Nothing Special   »   [go: up one dir, main page]

CA2952488C - Polyalkylene glycol with moiety for conjugating biologically active compounds - Google Patents

Polyalkylene glycol with moiety for conjugating biologically active compounds Download PDF

Info

Publication number
CA2952488C
CA2952488C CA2952488A CA2952488A CA2952488C CA 2952488 C CA2952488 C CA 2952488C CA 2952488 A CA2952488 A CA 2952488A CA 2952488 A CA2952488 A CA 2952488A CA 2952488 C CA2952488 C CA 2952488C
Authority
CA
Canada
Prior art keywords
alkyl
group
biologically
formula
substituted
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Expired - Lifetime
Application number
CA2952488A
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
CA2952488A1 (en
Inventor
Kochung Lin
R. Blake Pepinsky
Ling Ling Chen
Donna M. Hess
Edward Y. Lin
Russell C. Petter
Darren P. Baker
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Biogen MA Inc
Original Assignee
Biogen MA Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Biogen MA Inc filed Critical Biogen MA Inc
Publication of CA2952488A1 publication Critical patent/CA2952488A1/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of CA2952488C publication Critical patent/CA2952488C/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Expired - Lifetime legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08G—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED OTHERWISE THAN BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING UNSATURATED CARBON-TO-CARBON BONDS
    • C08G65/00—Macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions forming an ether link in the main chain of the macromolecule
    • C08G65/02—Macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions forming an ether link in the main chain of the macromolecule from cyclic ethers by opening of the heterocyclic ring
    • C08G65/32—Polymers modified by chemical after-treatment
    • C08G65/329—Polymers modified by chemical after-treatment with organic compounds
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08G—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED OTHERWISE THAN BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING UNSATURATED CARBON-TO-CARBON BONDS
    • C08G65/00—Macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions forming an ether link in the main chain of the macromolecule
    • C08G65/02—Macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions forming an ether link in the main chain of the macromolecule from cyclic ethers by opening of the heterocyclic ring
    • C08G65/32—Polymers modified by chemical after-treatment
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00—Medicinal preparations containing peptides
    • A61K38/16—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K38/17—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • A61K38/22—Hormones
    • A61K38/31—Somatostatins
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/56—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic macromolecular compound, e.g. an oligomeric, polymeric or dendrimeric molecule
    • A61K47/59—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic macromolecular compound, e.g. an oligomeric, polymeric or dendrimeric molecule obtained otherwise than by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. polyureas or polyurethanes
    • A61K47/60—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic macromolecular compound, e.g. an oligomeric, polymeric or dendrimeric molecule obtained otherwise than by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. polyureas or polyurethanes the organic macromolecular compound being a polyoxyalkylene oligomer, polymer or dendrimer, e.g. PEG, PPG, PEO or polyglycerol
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/16—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for liver or gallbladder disorders, e.g. hepatoprotective agents, cholagogues, litholytics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P21/00—Drugs for disorders of the muscular or neuromuscular system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12—Antivirals
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12—Antivirals
    • A61P31/14—Antivirals for RNA viruses
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12—Antivirals
    • A61P31/14—Antivirals for RNA viruses
    • A61P31/16—Antivirals for RNA viruses for influenza or rhinoviruses
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12—Antivirals
    • A61P31/14—Antivirals for RNA viruses
    • A61P31/18—Antivirals for RNA viruses for HIV
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12—Antivirals
    • A61P31/20—Antivirals for DNA viruses
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12—Antivirals
    • A61P31/20—Antivirals for DNA viruses
    • A61P31/22—Antivirals for DNA viruses for herpes viruses
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A61P35/02—Antineoplastic agents specific for leukemia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02—Immunomodulators
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08G—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED OTHERWISE THAN BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING UNSATURATED CARBON-TO-CARBON BONDS
    • C08G65/00—Macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions forming an ether link in the main chain of the macromolecule
    • C08G65/34—Macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions forming an ether link in the main chain of the macromolecule from hydroxy compounds or their metallic derivatives
    • C08G65/48—Polymers modified by chemical after-treatment
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08L—COMPOSITIONS OF MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS
    • C08L71/00—Compositions of polyethers obtained by reactions forming an ether link in the main chain; Compositions of derivatives of such polymers
    • C08L71/02—Polyalkylene oxides
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08L—COMPOSITIONS OF MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS
    • C08L2203/00—Applications
    • C08L2203/02—Applications for biomedical use

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Virology (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Oncology (AREA)
  • Communicable Diseases (AREA)
  • Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Biotechnology (AREA)
  • Gastroenterology & Hepatology (AREA)
  • Pulmonology (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Hospice & Palliative Care (AREA)
  • Psychiatry (AREA)
  • Orthopedic Medicine & Surgery (AREA)
  • AIDS & HIV (AREA)
  • Tropical Medicine & Parasitology (AREA)
  • Physical Education & Sports Medicine (AREA)
  • Endocrinology (AREA)
  • Zoology (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Medicinal Preparation (AREA)
  • Polyethers (AREA)

Abstract

The biological activity of biologically active compounds and reduction of toxicity is addressed by the conjugation of a biologically active compound with an activated polyalkylene glycol having a moiety which covalently bonds to the compound. A pharmaceutical composition containing the polyalkylene glycol conjugate and a carrier, and a method of treating a patient by the administration of a composition with the polyalkylene glycol conjugate are described.

Description

POLYALKYLENE GLYCOL WITH MOIETY FOR CONJUGATING
BIOLOGICALLY ACTIVE COMPOUNDS
RELATED APPLICATIONS
This application is a division of Canadian Patent Application Serial No.
2,840,490, filed January 17, 2003 (a division of Canadian Patent Application Serial No.
2,753,899, filed January 17, 2003, which is a division of Canadian Patent Application Serial No. 2,473,526, filed January 17, 2003 as the Canadian national phase application corresponding to International Patent Application Serial No.
PCT/U52003/001559, filed January 17, 2003).
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
The invention relates to novel polyalkylene glycol compounds, conjugates of the polymers and proteins, and uses thereof BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Covalent attachment of hydrophilic polymers, such as polyalkylene glycol polymers, also known as polyalkylene oxides, to biologically-active molecules and surfaces is of interest in biotechnology and medicine.
In particular, much research has focused on the use of poly(ethylene glycol) (PEG), also known as or poly(ethylene oxide) (PEO), conjugates to enhance solubility and stability and to prolong the blood circulation half-life of molecules.
In its most common form, PEG is a linear polymer terminated at each end with hydroxyl groups:
HO-CH2CH20-(CH2CH20),-,-CH2CH2-OH.
The above polymer, alpha-, omega-dihydroxylpoly(ethylene glycol), can also be represented as HO-PEG-OH, where it is understood that the -PEG-symbol represents thefollowing structural unit:
-CH2CH20-(CH2CH20) n-CH2CH2-where n typically ranges from about 4 to about 10,000. PEG is commonly used as methoxy-PEG-OH, or mPEG, in which one terminus is the relatively inert methoxy group, while the other terminus is a hydroxyl group that is subject to ready chemical modification. Additionally, random or block copolymers of different alkylene oxides (e.g., ethylene oxide and propylene oxide) that are closely related to PEG in their chemistry can be substituted for PEG in many of its applications.

To couple PEG to a molecule of interest, it is often necessary to activate the PEG
by preparing a derivative of the PEG having a reactive functional group at least at one terminus. The functional group is chosen based on the type of available reactive group on the molecule that will be coupled to the PEG.
PEG is a polymer having the properties of solubility in water and in many organic solvents, lack of toxicity, and lack of immunogenicity. One use of PEG
is to covalently attach the polymer to insoluble molecules to make the resulting PEG-molecule "conjugate" soluble.
1 a For example, it has been shown that the water-insoluble drug paclitaxel, when coupled to PEG, becomes water-soluble. Greenwald, et al., J. Org. Chem., 60:331-336 (1995).
The prodrug approach, in which drugs are released by degradation of more complex molecules (prodrugs) under physiological conditions, is a powerful component of drag delivery. Prodrugs can, for example, be formed by bonding PEG to drugs via linkages which are degradable under physiological conditions. The lifetime of PEG prodrugs in vivo depends upon the type of functional group(s) forming linkages between PEG and the drug. In general, ester linkages, formed by reaction of PEG carboxylic acids or activated PEG
carboxylic acids with alcohol groups on the drug hydrolyze under physiological conditions to release the drug, while amide and carbamate linkages, formed from amine groups on the drug, are stable and do not hydrolyze to release the free drug. It has been shown that hydrolytic delivery of drugs from PEG esters can be favorably controlled to a certain extent by controlling the number of linking methylene groups in a spacer between the terminal PEG oxygen and the carbonyl group of the attached carboxylic acid or carboxylic acid derivative. For example, Harris et al., in U.S. Patent No. 5,672,662, describe PEG butanoic acid and PEG propanoic acid, and activated derivatives thereof, as alternatives to carboxymethyl PEG for compounds where less hydrolytic reactivity in the corresponding ester derivatives is desirable. See, generally, PCT publication WO 01/46291.
One factor limiting the usefulness of proteinaceous substances for medical treatment applications is that, when given parenterally, they are eliminated from the body within a short time. This elimination can occur as a result of degradation by proteases or by clearance using normal pathways for protein elimination such as by filtration in the kidneys.
Oral administration of these substances is even more problematic because, in addition to proteolysis in the stomach, the high acidity of the stomach destroys these substances before they reach their intended target tissue. The problems associated with these routes of administration of proteins are well known in the pharmaceutical industry, and various strategies are being employed in attempts to solve them. A great deal of work dealing with protein stabilization has been published. Various ways of conjugating proteins vvith polymeric materials are known, including use of dextrans, polyvinyl pyrrolidones, glycopeptides, polyethylene glycol, and polyamino acids. The resulting conjugated polypeptides are reported to retain their biological activities and solubility in water for parenteral applications.
Of particular interest is increasing the biological activity of interferons while reducing the toxicity involved with use of these proteins for treating human patients.
Interferons are a family of naturally-occurring small proteins and glycoproteins produced and secreted by most nucleated cells in response to viral infection as well as to other antigenic stimuli. Interferons render cells resistant to viral infection and exhibit a wide variety of actions on cells. They exert their cellular activities by binding to specific membrane receptors on the cell surface.
Once bound to the cell membrane, interferons initiate a complex sequence of intracellular events. In vitro studies have demonstrated that these include the induction of certain enzymes;
suppression of cell proliferation, immunomodulation activities such as enhancement of the phagocytic activity of macrophages; augmentation of the specific cytotoxicity of lymphocytes for target cells; and inhibition of virus replication in virus-infected cells.
Interferons have been tested in the treatment of a variety of clinical disease states. The use of human interferon beta has been established in the treatment of multiple sclerosis. Two forms of recombinant interferon beta, have recently been licensed in Europe and the U.S. for treatment of this disease: interferon-beta-la (AVONEX , Biogen, Inc., Cambridge, MA and REB1F ' Serono, Geneva, Switzerland) and interferon-beta-lb (BETASERON , Berlex, Richmond, CA). Interferon beta-1a is produced in mammalian cells using the natural human gene sequence and is glycosylated, whereas interferon beta-lb is produced in E. coli bacteria using a modified human gene sequence that contains a genetically engineered cysteine-to-serine substitution at amino acid position 17 and is non-glycosylated.
Non-immune interferons, which include both alpha and beta interferons, are known to suppress human irrununodeficiency virus (HIV) in both acutely and chronically-infected cells.
See Poll and Fauci, 1992, AIDS Research and Human Retroviruses 8(2):191-197.
Due to their antiviral activity, interferons, in particular alpha interferons, have received considerable attention as therapeutic agents in the treatment of hepatitis C virus (HCV)-related disease. See Hoofnagle et al., in: Viral Hepatitis 1981 International Symposium, 1982, Philadelphia, Franldin Institute Press; Hoofnagle et al., 1986, New Eng. J. Med. 315:1575-1578; Thomson, 1987, Lancet 1:539-541 Kiyosawa et al., 1983, in: Zuckemian, ed., Viral Hepatitis and Liver Disease, Allen K.. Liss, New York pp. 895-897; Hoofnagle et al., 1985, Sem.
Liv. Dis., 1985, 9:259-263.
Interferon-polymer conjugates are described in, for example, U.S. Pat. No.
4,766,106, U.S. Pat. No. 4,917,888, European Patent Application No. 0 236 98'7, European Patent Application No. 0 510 356 and International Application Publication No. WO
95/13090.
Chronic hepatitis C is an insidious and slowly progressive disease having a significant impact on the quality of life. Despite improvement in the quality of the blood-donor pool and the recent implementation of testing of donated blood for HCV, the estimated incidence of acute infection among persons receiving transfusions is 5 to 10%. See Alter et al., in:
3 Zuckerman, ed., Viral Hepatitis and Liver Disease, Allen K. Liss, New York.
1988, pp. 537-542. Thus, of the approximately 3 million persons who receive transfusions in the United States each year, acute hepatitis C will develop in about 150,000. While many patients who contract hepatitis C will have subclinical or mild disease, approximately 50%
will progress to a chronic disease state characterized by fluctuating serum transaminase abnormalities and inflammatory lesions on liver biopsy. It is estimated that cirrhosis will develop in up to about 20% of this group. See Koretz et al., 1985, Gastroenterology 88:1251-1254.
Interferons are known to affect a variety of cellular functions, including DNA

replication, and RNA and protein synthesis, in both normal and abnormal cells.
Thus, cytotoxic effects of interferon are not restricted to tumor or virus-infected cells but are also manifested in normal, healthy cells. As a result, undesirable side effects may arise during interferon therapy, particularly when high doses are required. Administration of interferon can lead to myelosuppression, thereby resulting in reduced red blood cell count, and reduced white blood cell and platelet levels. Interferons commonly give rise to flu-like symptoms (e.g., fever, fatigue, headaches and chills), gastrointestinal disorders (e.g., anorexia, nausea and diarrhea), dizziness and coughing. Often, the sustained response of HCV patients to non-PEGylated interferon treatment is low and the treatment can induce severe side effects, including, but not limited to, retinopathy, thyroiditis, acute pancreatitis, and depression.
The undesirable side effects that accompany interferon therapy frequently limit the therapeutic usefulness of interferon treatment regimes. Thus, a need exists to maintain or improve the therapeutic benefits of such therapy while reducing or eliminating the undesirable side effects.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
The invention relates to novel polyalkylene glycol compounds, conjugates of these compounds, and uses thereof.
In one aspect, the invention relates to an activated polyalkylene glycol polymer having the structure according to Formula I:
Formula I
- Z' =
P¨X---(C112),1 ______________ Q¨(Y),, __ (cii2)õ c¨ (cHAT----R
- P
wherein P is a polyalkylene glycol polymer;
4 X and Y are independently 0, S, CO, CO2, cos, SO, SO2, CONR', SO2NR', or NR';
Q is a C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl (including fused bicyclic and bridged bicyclic ring structures), a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, fonnyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, irnine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, sulfamoyl, sulfonate, silyl, ether, and alkyIthio;
each R', Z and Z' is independently hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted allcaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, =tido, anticline, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, =sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, sulfamoyl, sulfonate, silyl,= ether, and'alkylthio;
R is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula I
and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof;
m is 0 or 1;
each n is independently 0 or an integer from 1 to 5; and p is 1, 2, or 3.
In another aspect, the invention relates to an activated polyalkylene glycol compound (PGC) having the structure according to Formula Ia:
Formula Ia P¨X--Q __________________________ (Y)m __ (C112)0 CH¨R
where P is a polyalkylene glycol polymer, m is zero or one, n is zero or an integer from one to five, and X and Y are independently 0, S, CO, CO2, cos, SO, SO2, CONR', SO2NR', or NR'.
5 Q is a C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a CI to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group. If present, the substituents can be halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carbox-ylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonaruido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, sulfamoyl, sulfonate, silyl, ether, or alkylthio. Heterocyclic and carbocyclic groups include fused bicyclic and bridged bicyclic ring structures.
Each R' and Z is independently hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to Cg saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group. The substituents can be halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromafic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, or allcylthio.
Compounds which include chiral carbons can be in the R configuration, the S
configuration, or may be racemic.
R is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula I
and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
In one embodiment, R is ,a carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinimidyl, azole, maleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, or a glyoxal moiety.
In certain embodiments, P is a polyethylene glycol having the structure of Formula Formula E-(0-CH2CH2)a-, where E is hydrogen or a straight- or branched-chain C1 to C20 allcyl group and a is an integer from 4 to 10,000. For example, E can be a methyl group.
6 In other embodiments, E can be a detectable label, such as, for example, a radioactive isotope, a fluorescent moiety, a phosphorescent moiety, a chemilurninescent moiety, or a quantum dot.
In yet other embodiments, E is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula I and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
For example, E can be a carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or =substituted thiol, halogen, substituted or =substituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, 1 0 iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinimidyl, azole, maleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, or a glyoxal moiety.
In still other embodiments, E has the structure according to Formula 111 or Formula IV:
Formula III
R"¨HC¨(C1-12),, _______________________ Q ¨X¨ CW2CW2-Formula IV
R'¨HC¨(CH2)7, ---X¨CW2CW2¨

where each Q, X, Y, Z, m, and n are, independently, as defined above; and each W is, independently, hydrogen or a C1 to C7 alkyl.
R" is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula III
and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof and R'" is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula IV and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof. For example, R" and R" can be a carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or =substituted thiol, halogen, substituted or =substituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinimidyl, azole, maleirnide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, or a glyoxal moiety. R" and R" can be the same or different from R.
In particular embodiments, Q is a substituted or =substituted aIkaryl, In another aspect, the invention relates to an activated PGC having the structure according to Formula V:
7 =
Formula V
___________________________________ T2 __ (.17)m __ (MAI __ CH¨R
X---TI
where P, X, Y, R', Z, R m, and n are as defined, and T1 and T2 are, independently, absent, or a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, a C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroallcaryl group. The substituents can be halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, arnidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroarornatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, or aLkylthio.
L may be absent (e.g., d is zero) or there may be from one to four (e.g., n is an integer from one to four) L substituents on the aromatic ring in addition to the Ti and T2 substituents, and each L is, independently, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a CI to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group. The substituents are selected from halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, araIkyI, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and allcylthio.
R is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula V
and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof. For example, R is chosen from carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted tbiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinimidyl, azole, rnaleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, fresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyi, and glyoxal.
8 In one embodiment of the activated polyalkylene glycol polymer of Formula V, P
is a polyethylene glycol having the structure of Formula II:
Formula II:
E-(0-CH2C112)õ-where E is hydrogen or a straight- or branched-chain C1 to C20 alkyl group and a is an integer from 4 to 10,000. For example, E can be methyl. In other embodiments, E is a detectable label, such as, for example, a radioactive isotope, fluorescent moiety, phosphorescent moiety, chemiluminescent moiety, or a quantum dot.
In another aspect, P is a polyethylene glycol having the structure of Formula II:
Forrnula LI:
E-(0-CH2CH2)a-, where E is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula V and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof and a is an integer from 4 to 10,000. For example, E is chosen from carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, =
iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuceinimidyl, azole, maleimide, sulfone, ally', vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, rnesyl, tosyl, and glyoxarmoieties.
In another aspect, E has the structure according to Formula HI or Formula IV:
Formula III
R"¨}1C-1 (C112)n _______________________ (Y)m¨Q¨X¨CW2CW2¨

i Formula IV
R"'¨HC¨(C112)õ _______________________ X CW2CW2-where Q is a C3 to Cs saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl (including fused bicyclic and bridged bicyclic ring structures), a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl; the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, and the substituents can be of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano,Thitro,
9 azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamiclo, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaramatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, or alkylthio.
X, Y, Z, in, and n are as defined, and each W is, independently, hydrogen or a C1 to C7 alkyl; and R" is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula III
and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, and R" is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula IV and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
In certain embodiments, R" and R" can be the sane as or different from R, and are chosen from carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, suceinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, ditlaiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinimidyl, azole, maleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, and glyoxal moieties. In one embodiment of the compound of Formula V, X and Y, if present, are oxygen.
In another aspect the invention relates to an activated PGC having the structure according to Formula VI: =
Formula VI
(Lr)d It T2¨Mm ________________________________________ (CH2)11 _________________ X __ T1 where P is a polyalkylene glycol polymer, m is zero or one, n is zero or an integer from one to five, X and Y are independently 0, S, CO, CO2, COS, SO, S02, CONR', SO2NR', or NR', and T1 and T2 are, independently, absent, or a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group.
Each R' and Z is, independently, hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group.
d is zero or an integer from one to four; and each L is, independently, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to 03 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein. the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group. The substituents are selected from halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, f.
thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoxyl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, anticline, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryI, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, or alkylthio moieties.
In one embodiment, the activated PGC according to Formula VI has the structure according to Formula VII or Formula VIII:
Formula VII:
________________________________________ (CH2), p¨o 0 Formula VIII:
2IL(CH2)õ....{
P-0 H .
In one embodiment of the activated polyalkylene glycol compounds of Formulae VII
and VIII, P is a polyethylene glycol having the structure of Formula II:
Formula II:
E-(0-C112CH2)a-where E is hydrogen or a straight- or branched-chain C1 to C20 alkyl group and a is an integer from 4 to 10,000. For example, E can be methyl. In other embodiments, E is a detectable label, such as, for example, a radioactive isotope, fluorescent moiety, phosphorescent moiety, chemiluminescent moiety, or a quantum dot.
In another aspect, P is a polyethylene glycol having the structure of Formula II:
Formula II:
E-(0-CI-12CH2)a-, where E is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula VII or VIII
and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof and a is an integer from 4 to 10,000.
For example, E is chosen from carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, metbacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinimidyl, azole, maleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, and glyoxal moieties.

In another aspect, E has the structure according to Formula III or Formula IV:
Formula 111 R"¨HC¨(CH2)õ Q ¨X¨CW2CW2¨

Formula IV
R"1-1.1C¨(CH2)õ _______________________ X CW2CW2-where Q is a C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl; the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, and the substituents can be of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, or alkylthio. Heterocyclic and carbocyclic groups include fused bicyclic and bridged bicyclic ring structures X, Y, Z, m, and n are as defined, and each W is, independently, hydrogen or a C1 to C7 alkyl; and R" is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula III
and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, and R" is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula IV and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
In certain_embodiments, R" and R" can be the same as or different from R, and are chosen from carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinimidyl, azole, maleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, and glyoxal moieties.
In one embodiment, the activated polyalkylene glycol compound of Formula 'VIH, the ring substituents are located in a meta arrangement. In another embodiment, the ring substituents are located in a para arrangement.
In another embodiment, the activated polyalkylene glycol compound according to Formula VI, has the structure according to Formula IX:

Formula lX:

¨(cHou¨ _______ ( CH2)n C11-1 --- (CH2)iC
where P is a polyalkylene glycol polymer, each n and u are, independently, zero or an integer from one to five; and Z is hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group.
In one embodiment of the compounds of Formula IX, the ring substituents are located in a meta arrangement. In another embodiment of the compounds of Formula IX, the ring substituents are located in a para arrangement.
In another embodiment of the compounds of Formula IX, P is a polyethylene glycol having the structure of Formula II:
Formula II:
E-(0-CH2CH2)3,-where E is hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain C1 to C20 alkyl group, a detectable label, or a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula a and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof and a is an integer from 4 to 10,000.
In another aspect, the invention involves an activated polyalkylene glycol polymer having the structure according to Formula X:
Formula X:
- Z' -P X _________________________ (CH2)õ __ C __ (CH2)õ¨R
Z- _ p wherein P is a polyalkylene glycol polymer;
X is 0, S, CO, CO2, COS, SO, S02, CONR', SO2NR', or NR';
R' is hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, forrnyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and alkylthio;
Z and Z' are individually hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroallcyl group, C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroallcyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and alkylthio, provided that at least one Z or Z' is not hydrogen;
R is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula X
and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof;
each n is independently 0 or an integer from 1 to 5; and p is 1, 2, or 3.
In another aspect, the invention involves an activated polyalkylene glycol compound (PGC) having the structure according to Formula Xa:
Formula Xa:
P X ___ (CH2)õ-- CH --R
- In these compounds, P is a polyalkylene glycol polymer, such as, for example, PEG or mPEG.
X is 0, S, CO, CO2, COS, SO, S02, CONR', SO2NR', or NR', and R', if present, is hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to Cs saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroallcyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a CI to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, aziT'do, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfarnoyl, sulfonarnido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and allcylthio.
Z is a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to Cs saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydiyl, sulfate, sulfonate, Sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyelyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and alkylthio.
R is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula X
and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof; and n is 0 or an integer from 1 to 5, such that there are between zero and five methylene groups between X and the Z-containing carbon.
In one embodiment, R is chosen from the group consisting of carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methaerylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyariate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinin-ndyl, azole, maleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, and glyoxal.
In another embodiment, P is a polyethylene glycol having the structure of Formula II:
Formula E-(0-CH2CH2),-wherein E is hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain C1 to C20 alkyl group, or a detectable label; and a is an integer from 4 to 10,000. In a further embodiment, E may be methyl.
In yet another embodiment, P is a polyethylene glycol having the structure of Formula 11, wherein E is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula X and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof and a is an integer from 4 to 10,000.
In an additional embodiment, E is chosen from the group consisting of carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylarnide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothioc-yanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoaceta.mide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinimidyl, azole, maleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, and glyoxal. Alternatively, E may have the structure according to Formula III:
Formula III
R"¨HC¨(CH2)õ _____________________ (Y)m¨ Q --X¨ CW2CW2¨

wherein P is a polyalkylene glycol polymer;
X and Y are independently 0, S, CO, CO2, cos, SO, SO2, CONR', SO2NR', or NR_';
1 0 Q is a C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl (including fused bicyclic and bridged bicyclic ring structures), a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, 1 5 thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, hnino, silyl, ether, and allcylthio;
R' and each Z are independently as described above;
20 m is 0 or 1;
each W is, independently, hydrogen or a C1 to C7 alkyl;
each n is independently 0 or an integer from 1 to 5; and R" is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula III
and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof. Heterocyclic and carbocyclic groups 25 include fused bicyclic and bridged bicyclic ring structures.
In still a further embodiment, E has the structure according to Formula IV:
Formula IV
R"¨HC¨(CH2) __________________________ X CW2CW2 wherein each X, Z and n are, independently, as defined;
30 each W is, independently, hydrogen or a C1 to C7 alkyl; and R" is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula IV
and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
In an additional embodiment, R" is chosen from the group consisting of carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected bydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinimidyl, azole, maleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, rnesyl, tosyl, and glyoxal.
In a further embodiment, R' is chosen from the group consisting of carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinirnidyl, azole, maleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, and glyoxal.
in another embodiment, E is a detectable label. Additionally, E may be selected from the group consisting of radioactive isotopes, fluorescent moieties, phosphorescent moieties, chemiluminescent moieties, and quantum dots.
In still another embodiment, the activated PGC according to the invention has the structure according to Formula XI:
Formula XI:

p 0 H
wherein P is a polyallcylene glycol polymer; and n and Z are as defined.
In another embodiment, the activated polyallcylene glycol has the structure according to Formula XII:

Formula XII:
O
CH3 (OcH2cH2)ao¨ (CH2)õ
wherein n, a, and Z are as defined above. In one embodiment, Z may be methyl.
In some embodiments, n is one.
In another aspect, the invention involves an activated polyallcylene glycol compound of having the structure according to Formula XIII:
Formula XIII:
O
cH3 (OCH2C112)a0H

where a is an integer from 4 to 10,000.
The invention is also concerned with a composition of the activated polyalkylene glycol compounds of the invention and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof. In various embodiments, the biologically-active compound or precursor thereof is chosen from the group consisting of a peptide, peptide analog, protein, enzyme, small molecule, dye, lipid, nucleoside, oligonucleotide, oligonucleotide analog, sugar, oligosaccharide, cell, virus, liposome, microparticle, surface, and a micelle.
In another aspect, the invention provides a composition having the structure according to Formula XIV:
Formula XIV:
- Z' -I
_________________________________________ (CliDn C¨(C112)17-R*¨B
¨ P
wherein P is a polyallcylene glycol polymer;
X and Y are independently 0, S, CO, CO2, cos, SO, S02, CONR', SO2NR', or NR';
Q is a C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroallcyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulthydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and alkylthio;
each R', Z, and Z' is independently hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated CI to C20 alkyl or heteroallcyl group, C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryI
group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkatyl wherein the alkyl is a 01 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and alkylthio;
R* is a linking moiety;
B is a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof m is 0 or 1;
each n is independently 0 or an integer from 1 to 5; and p is 1, 2, or 3.
In another aspect, the invention involves a composition having the structure according to Formula XlVa:
Formula XfVa:
P--X Q __________________________ (Y
wherein P is a polyalkylene glycol polymer;
X and Y are independently 0, S, CO, CO2, cos, SO, SO2, CONR', SO2NR', or NR';
Q is a 03 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroallcyl (including fused bicyclic and bridged bicyclic ring structures), a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group (including fused bicyclic and bridged bicyclic ring structures), or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, c.
thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and alkylthio;
each R' and Z is independently hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted allcaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thiofomaate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and allcylthio;
R* is a linking moiety formed from the reaction of R. with a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof;
B is a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof after conjugation with R;
m is 0 or 1; and n is 0 or an integer from 1 to 5.
hrone embodiment, R* is a linking moiety formed from the reaction of R with a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof. For example, R is a moiety selected from the group consisting of carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hyclroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinimidyl, azole, maleirnide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, and glyoxal.
In another embodiment, P is a polyethylene glycol having the structure of Formula II:
Formula II:
E-(0-CH2CH2)a-wherein E is hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain C1 to C20 alkyl group, or a detectable label; and a is an integer from 4 to 10,000. In this embodiment, E may be methyl.
In a further embodiment, P is a polyethylene glycol having the structure of Formula II:

Formula H:
E-(0-CH2CH2),-wherein E is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula MV and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof and a is an integer from 4 to 10,000.
Here, in still a further embodiment, E may form a bond to another biologically-active compound, B. Alternatively, E may form a bond to a biologically-active compound other than B. E may also form an additional bond to the biologically-active compound, B.
In various embodiments, E may be chosen from the group consisting of carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinirnidyl, azole, maleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, and glyoxal. In another embodiment, E may have the structure according to Formula HI:
Formula 111 R"¨HC¨(CH2) _________________________ (Y)m¨Q¨X¨CW2CW2¨

wherein each Q, X, Y, Z, m, and n are, independently, as defined, each W is, independently, hydrogen or a C1 to C7 alkyl; and R" is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula 111 and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
In a further embodiment, E has the structure according to Formula IV:
Formula IV
R"1¨HC¨(CH2 wherein each X, Z and n are, independently, as defmed, each W is, independently, hydrogen or a C1 to C7 alkyl; and R" is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula IV
and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
In various embodiments, R" is chosen from the group consisting of carboxylic-acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinimidyl, azole, maleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinirnidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, and glyoxal.
Likewise, in other embodiments, R" is chosen from the group consisting of carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylarnide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinimidyl, azole, maleirnide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, and glyoxal.
In still other embodiments, E is a detectable label. For example, E may be selected from the group consisting of radioactive isotopes, fluorescent moieties, phosphorescent moieties, chemiluminescent moieties, and quantum dots.
In various embodiments, Q is a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl.
In another aspect, the invention involves a composition having the structure according to Formula XV:
Formula XV
________________________________ T
2 COm ________________________________________ (CH2)h----CH¨R*¨B
P¨X¨T1 (L)d wherein P is a polyalkylene glycol polymer; m is zero or one; d is zero or an integer from one to four; and n is zero or an integer from one to five.
X and Y are independently 0, S, CO, CO2, cos, SO, S02, co', SO2NR', or NR';
and T1 and T2 are, independently, absent, or a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, a C3 to Cs saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroallcyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkatyl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioforrnate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and alkylthio.
Each R' and Z is, independently, hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to Cg saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonarnido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and alkylthio.
Each L is, independently, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to Cg saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or =substituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or, =substituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected frorn the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amity), amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and alkylthio.
R* is a linking moiety formed from the reaction of R with a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, and B is a biologically-active compound, or precursor thereof, after conjugation with R.
For example, R may be a moiety selected from the group consisting of carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or =substituted thiol, halogen, substituted or =substituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinimidyl, azole, maleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, and glyoxal.
In another embodiment, P is a polyethylene glycol having the structure of Formula II:

Formula II:
E-(0-CH2CH2),-wherein E is hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain C1 to C20 alkyl group, or a detectable label; and a is an integer from 4 to 10,000. In this embodiment, E
may be methyl.
In still another aspect, P is a polyethylene glycol having the structure of Formula II:
Formula EL
E-(0-CH2C112)a-wherein E is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula XV and a biologically-active cornpourid or precursor thereof and a is an integer from 4 to
10,000. Here, E may be selected from the group consisting of carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetarnide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinimidyl, azole, maleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, and glyoxal. Additionally, E may have the structure according to:
Formula III
R"¨HC¨ (CH2) (Y)mQXCW2 CW2 -I
wherein Q is a C3 to Cs saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, (including fused bicyclic and bridged bicyclic ring structures), a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and allcylthio;
each X, Y, Z, m, and n are, independently, as defined;
each W is, independently, hydrogen or a C1 to C7 alkyl; and R" is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula III
and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
In another embodiment, E can have the structure according to Formula IV:
Formula IV
Ir¨HC¨(CH2),-;--X¨CW2CW2¨

.
wherein X, Z and n are as defined;
each W is, independently, hydrogen or a C1 to Gi alkyl; and R' " is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula IV and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
In still another embodiment, R" is chosen from the group consisting of carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinimidyl, azole, maleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, and glyoxal.
Likewise, in other ernbodhnents, R" may selected from the group consisting of carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinimidyl, azole, maleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, and glyoxal.
In other embodiments, E is a detectable label. For example, E may be selected from the group consisting of radioactive isotopes, fluorescent moieties, phosphorescent moieties, chemiluminescent moieties, and quantum dots.
In another aspect, the invention relates to a composition having the structure according to Formula XVI:

Formula X.WI
(pa / B
ti T2-(Y)m ______________________________________ (MAI
P ¨X¨T1 where m is 0 or 1, n is 0 or an integer from 1 to 5, P is a polyalkylene glycol polymer, X and Y
are independently 0, S, CO, CO2, cos, SO, SO2, CONR', SO2NR', or NR', T1 and T2 are, independently, absent, or a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, and each R' and Z is independently hydrogen, a straight-or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group;
d is 0 or an integer from 1 to 4, and each L is, independently, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group. The substituents are selected from halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydry-1, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, arallcyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and alkylthio groups.
R* is a linking moiety formed from the reaction of R with a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, and B is a biologically-active compound, or precursor thereof, after conjugation with R.
For example, R may be a moiety selected from the group consisting of carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuceinimidyl, azole, maleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, and glyoxal.
In one embodiment, R* is a methylene group and B is a biologically-active molecule having an amino group, where the methylene group forms a bond with the amino group on B.
In certain embodiments, the amine is the amino terminus of a peptide, an amine -of an amino acid side chain of a peptide, or an amine of a glycosylation substituent of a glycosylated peptide. For example, the peptide can be an interferon, such as interferon-beta, e.g., interferon-beta-1a.
In some embodiments, the compound according to Formula XVI has a structure according to Formula XVII:
Formula XVII:
=
_____________________________________ (CH2)n P-0 =
where P is a polyalkylene glycol polymer, Z is hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, n is 0 or an integer from I to 5.
R* is a linking moiety formed from the reaction of R with a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, and B is a biologically-active compound, or precursor thereof, after conjugation with R.
For example, R may be a moiety selected from the group consisting of carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinimidyl, azole, maleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinfinidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, and glyoxaI.
In one embodiment, R* of Formula XVII is a methylene group and B is a biologically-active molecule having an amino group, where the methylene group forms a bond with the amino group on B.
In certain embodiments, the amine is the amino terminus of a peptide, an amine of an amino acid side chain of a peptide, or an amine of a glycosylation substituent of a glycosylated peptide. For example, the peptide can be an interferon, such as interferon-beta, e.g., interferon-beta-1a.
In other embodiments, the compound according to Formula XVI has a structure according to Formula XVII:

7, Formula XVIII
(CH2)a¨R*¨B
__________________________ 0 where P is a polYalkylene glycol polymer, R* is a linking moiety, B is a biologically-active molecule, and n is one or two.
In one embodiment, R* of Formula XVIII is a methylene group and B is a biologically-active molecule having an amino group, where the methylene group forms a bond with the amino group on B.
In certain embodiments, the amine is the amino terminus of a peptide, an amine of an amino acid side chain of a peptide, or an amine of a glycosylation substituent of a glycosylated peptide. For example, the peptide can be an interferon, such as interferon-beta, e.g., interferon-beta-1a.
In certain embodiments of the compound according to Formula XVI, P is a polyethylene glycol having the structure of Formula II:
Formula E-(0-CH2CH2)a-wherein E is hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain CI to C20 alkyl (e.g., methyl) group, a detectable label, or a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula XVI and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof and a is an integer from 4 to 10,000. When E is a detectable label, the label can be, for example, a radioactive isotope, fluorescent moiety, phosphorescent moiety, chemiluminescent moiety, or a quantum dot.
In another embodiment, where E is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula XVI and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, E is chosen from carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thioI, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinirnidyl, azole, maleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, and glyoxal moieties.
In another embodiment, E has the structure according to Formula III or Formula IV:

Formula III
R"¨HC¨(C112), Q¨X¨CW2CW2¨

Formula IV
R"1¨HC¨ (CH2 r)-7--X¨CW,CW2-where Q is a C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl (including fused bicyclic and bridged bicyclic ring structures), a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaly1 group, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl; the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, and the substituents can be of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, or alkylthio.
X, Y, Z, m, and n are as defined, and each W is, independently, hydrogen or a C1 to C7 alkyl; and R" is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula III
and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, and R" is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula IV and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
In certain embodiments, R" and R" can be the same as or different from R, and are chosen from carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinirnidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinimidyl, azole, maleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, and glyoxal moieties.
In other embodirrients of the compound according to Formula XVI, the compound can have the structure according to Formula XIX:

Formula XIX:
______________________________ (CH2)u __ 0 (CH2)n¨CH¨R*
0-- (CH2)u wherein P is a polyalkylene glycol polymer, each n and u are, independently, zero or an integer from one to five, Z is hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated Ci to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group.
R* is a linking moiety formed from the reaction of R with a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, and B is a biologically-active compound, or precursor thereof, after conjugation with R.
In one embodiment, R* of Formula XIX is a methylene group and B is a biologically-active molecule having an amino group, where the methylene group forms a bond with the amino group on B.
In certain embodiments, the amine is the amino temiinus of a peptide, an amine of an amino acid side chain of a peptide, or an amine of a glycosylation substituent of a glycosylated peptide. For example, the peptide can be an interferon, such as interferon-beta, e.g., interferon-beta-la.
In another aspect, the invention relates to a composition according to Formula K_K:
Formula XX:
(L)d I 2 Orr-õ (CH2L B
B'-1Z4Itill-(CH2),,-(Y),-Q-X-CW2CW2-(0-CH2CH2),-X-Ti where m is 0 or 1, d is 0 or an integer from 1 to 4, a is an integer from 4 to 10,000, and n is 0 or an integer from 1 to 5.
Each X and Y is independently 0, S, CO, CO2, COS, SO, S02, CONR', SO2NR', or NR', or NR', T1 and T2 are, independently, absent, or a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated CI to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, and each R' and Z is independently hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group.
When present, each L is, independently, a straight- or branched-chain, saturatecl or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroallcyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to 020 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group. The substituents are selected from halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thiofonnate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and allcylthio.
Q is a C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl (including fused bicyclic and bridged bicyclic ring structures), a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the allcyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroallcaryl group. The substituents can be halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulthydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, arallcyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, or allcylthio.
Each W is, independently, hydrogen or a CI to C7 alkyl.
R* and R** are, independently, linking moieties formed from the reaction of R
and R"
with a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, and B and B' are each a biologically-active compound, or precursor thereof, after conjugation with R
and R", respectively.
In some embodiments, B and B' are the same type of biologically-active compound. In other embodiments, B and B' are different biologically-active compounds. In still other embodiments, B and B' are the same biologically active molecule. In additional embodiments, R* and R** are the same. In other embodiments, R* and R** are different.
In another aspect, the invention relates to a composition according to Formula XXI:
Formula XXI:
(L)d *--13 T2--(Y);-(CH2)õ
B'-12.2"--'-Cp¨(CH2)õ¨X-CW2CW2¨(0-CH2C1-12)a¨X¨Ti where m is 0 or 1, d is 0 or an integer from 1 to 4, a is an integer from 4 to 10,000, and n is 0 or an integer from 1 to 5.
X and Y are independently 0, S, CO, CO2, cos, SO, SO2, CONR', SO2NR', or NR', T1 and T2 are, independently, absent, or a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated .F
C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, each R' and Z is, independently, hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated CI to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group.
When present, each L is, independently, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to Cg saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonarnido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and alkylthio, and each W
is, independently, hydrogen or a C1 to C7 alkyl.
R* and R** are, independently, linking moieties formed from the reaction of R
and R"
with a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, and B and B' are each a biologically-active compound, or precursor thereof, after conjugation with R
and R", respectively.
In some embodiments, B and B' are the same type of biologically-active compound. In other embodiments, B and B' are different biologically-active compounds. In still other embodiments, B and B' are the same biologically active molecule. In additional embodiments, R* and R** are the same. In other embodiments, R* and R** are different.
In another aspect, the invention involves a composition having the structure according to Formula )0al:
Formula XXII:
- Z' P¨X¨(CH2)õ _________________________ C __ (CH2),3¨R*-33 P
wherein P is a polyalkylene glycol polymer;
X is 0, S, CO, CO2, cos, SO, SO2, CONR', SO2NR', or NR';
R' is hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C; to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to Cg saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the allcyI is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, inrine, cyano, nitro, azido, suLfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and alkylthio;
each Z and Z' is independently hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and alkylthio, provided that at least one Z or Z' is not hydrogen;
R* is a linking moiety;
B is a biologically-active molecule;
each n is 0 or an integer from 1 to 5; and pis 1, 2, or 3.
In a further aspect, the invention involves a composition having the structure according =
to Formula =a:
Formula XXIIa:
p--x--- (CH2)/c¨Cli¨le¨B
wherein P is a polyalkylene glycol polymer;
X is 0, S, CO, CO2, cos, SO, S02, CONR', SO2NR', or NR'; and n is 0 or an integer from 1 to 5.
R' is hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to Cg saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, irnino, silyl, ether, and alkylthio;
Z is a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated CI to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted allcaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and allcylthio;
R* is a linking moiety formed from the reaction of R with a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, and B is a biologically-active compound, or precursor thereof, after conjugation with R.
In one embodiment, R* is formed from the reaction of a moiety selected from the group consisting of carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylarnide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinimidyl, azole, maleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, and glyoxal with a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
In an additional embodiment, P is a polyethylene glycol having the structure of Formula II:
Formula II:
E-(0-CH2CH2)a-, wherein E is hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain C1 to C20 alkyl group, or a detectable label; and a is an integer from 4 to 10,000. In this embodiment, E
may be methyl.
In another embodiment, P is a polyethylene glycol having the structure of Formula II:
Formula II:
E-(0-CH2CH2)a-, e= -wherein E is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula II
and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof and a is an integer from 4 to 10,000.
In this embodiment, E may bind to a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof other than B. In other embodiments, E forms an additional bond to the biologically-active compound B.
In various embodiments, E may be selected from the group consisting of carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetarnide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinimidyl, azole, maleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, and glyoxal.
In other embodiments, E has the structure according to Formula III:
Formula 111 Q¨X¨ CW2CW2-wherein P is a polyalkylene glycol polymer;
each X and Y is independently 0, S, CO, CO2, COS, SO, 302, CONR', SO2NR', or NR';
Q is a C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl (including fused bicyclic and bridged bicyclic ring structures), a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thiofonnate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, arnidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and alkylthio;
R' and each Z are independently as described above;
m is 0 or 1;
each n is independently 0 or an integer from 1 to 5;
R" is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula III
and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof; and each W is, independently, hydrogen or a C1 to C7 alkyl.
In a further embodiment, E has the structure according to Formula IV:
Formula IV
13."¨HC¨(CH2 wherein each X, Z and n are, independently, as defined;
each IV is, independently, hydrogen or a C1 to C7 alkyl; and R" is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula IV
and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
In still further embodiments;R" is chosen from the group consisting of carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinimidyl, azole, maleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, and glyoxal.
In yet other embodiments, R" is chosen from the group consisting of carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinimidyl, azole, maleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, and glyoxal.
In additional embodiments, E is a detectable label. For example, E may be selected from the group consisting of radioactive isotopes, fluorescent moieties, phosphorescent moieties, chemiluminescent moieties and quantum dots.
In another embodiment, R* is methylene and B is a biologically-active molecule attached via an amine. For example, the amine is the amino terminus of a peptide. In a further embodiment, the peptide is an interferon such as interferon-beta-la.
In another embodiment, the invention is a composition having the structure according to Formula XXIII:

Formula XMI:
R*
0-13 (OCH2CH2)a0_ (.2). r wherein n, a, R* B, and Z are as defined above. In one additional embodiment, Z is methyl and n is one.
In still a further aspect, the invention involves a composition according to Formula XXIV:
Formula XXIV: t R B
¨R-*=- CIB¨(CH2)õ¨(Y)m¨Q¨X¨CW2CW2¨(0-CH2CH21---X-- (CHA

wherein m is 0 or 1, a is an integer from 4 to 10,000; and each n is independently zero or an integer from 1 to 5. Each X and Y is independently 0, S, CO, CO2, cos, SO, SO2, CONR', SO2NR', or NR'; each R' and Z is, independently, hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group; and each W is, independently, hydrogen or a C1 to C7 alkyl.
Q is a C3 to Cg saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl (including fused bicyclic and bridged bicyclic ring structures), a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, arnidine, imine, eyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and allcylthio.
R* and R** are, independently, linking moieties formed from the reaction of R
and R"
with a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, and B and B' are each a biologically-active compound, or precursor thereof, after conjugation with R
and R", respectively.
In some embodiments, 13 and B' are the same type of biologically-active compound. In other embodiments, B and B' are different biologically-active compounds. In still other embodiments, B and B' are the same biologically active molecule. In additional embodiments, R* and R** are the same. In other embodiments, R* and R** are different.
In a further aspect, the invention involves a composition according to Formula )MT:
Formula XXV:

B`---R¨ CH¨

(CH2);EX¨CW2CW2 ______________________ (0-CH2CH2),---X----(C112)õ
wherein X is 0, S, CO, CO2, COS, SO, SO2, CONR', SO2NR', or NR'; a is an integer from 4 to 10,000; and each n is independently 0 or an integer from 1 to 5.
Each and Z is independently hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroallcyl group, and each W is, independently, hydrogen or a C1 to C7 alkyl.
R* and R** are, independently, linking moieties formed from the reaction of R
and R"
with a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, and B and B' are each a biologically-active compound, or precursor thereof, after conjugation with R
and R", respectively.
In some embodiments, B and B' are the same type of biologically-active compound. In other embodiments, B and B' are different biologically-active compounds. In still other embodiments, B and B' are the same biologically active molecule. In additional embodiments, R* and R** are the same. In other embodiments, R* and R** are different.
The invention also involves a pharmaceutical composition containing the compositions of the invention along with a pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier. In various embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition also contains an additional biologically-active agent. For example, the biologically-active agent may be selected from the group consisting of a peptide, peptide analog, protein, enzyme, small molecule, dye, lipid, nucleoside, oligonucleotide, oligonucleotide analog, sugar, oligosaccharide, cell, virus, liposome, microparticle, surface, and a micelle. In another embodiment, the biologically-active agent is an antiviral agent.
In another aspect, the invention relates to a composition comprising the product of the reaction of the compound of Formula I and a biologically-active compound or a precursor thereof (B).
In one embodiment, the composition has the structure according to Formula XIV:

Formula XIV:
p x _______________________ Q ___ (Y)õ, __ (C112),-,--CII¨R*¨B
where all variables are as defined above, and R* is a linking moiety formed by the reaction of R with a reactive moiety on the biologically-active compound or precursor thereof and B is a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
In another aspect, the invention relates to a composition comprising the product of the reaction of the compound of Formula V and a biologically-active compound or a precursor thereof. In one embodiment, the composition has the structure according to Formula XV:
Formula XV:
________________________________ T2¨(Y)n, ___ (CH2),(1---CH¨R*¨B
____________ X T1 (L)d where all variables are as defined above, R* is a linking moiety formed by the reaction of R
with a reactive moiety on the biologically-active compound or precursor thereof and B is a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
In yet another embodiment, the composition has the structure according to Formula 30( or MCI:
Formula XX:
B'--R'-'71--(cHz)õ¨(Y)Q-xcw2cW2(0-cH20-12)a¨x¨TI
Formula XXI:
(L)d (CH2)n F¨R11-e "CI CW2CW2 (0-C112CH2)n¨X¨T1 where all variables are as defined above, each W is, independently, hydrogen or a C1 to C7 alkyl, R* is a linking moiety formed by the reaction of R with a reactive moiety on the biologically-active compound, B, or precursor thereof; R** is a linking moiety formed by the reaction of R" or R" with a reactive moiety on the biologically-active compound, B;*, or precursor thereof; and B and B' are, independently, a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof. In some embodiments, B and B' are the same type of biologically-active compound. In other embodiments, B and B' are different biologically-active compounds. In still other embodiments, B and B' are the same biologically active molecule.
In additional embodiments, R* and R** are the same. In other embodiments, R* and R** are different.
In another aspect, the invention relates to a composition comprising the product of the reaction of the compound Formula VI and a biologically-active compound or a precursor thereof In one embodiment, the composition has the structure according to Formula XVI:
Fonnula XVI:
(1--dd _________________________________ T2¨Mni ___ (CH2L

where all variables are as defined above, R* is a linking moiety formed by the reaction of R
with a reactive moiety on the biologically-active compound or precursor thereof and B is a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
In another aspect, the invention relates to a composition comprising the product of the reaction of the compound of Formula VII and a biologically-active compound or a precursor thereof.
In one embodiment, the composition has the structure according to Formula XVII:
Formula XVII:
/L'R*7--, ________________________________________ (CI12)n where all variables are as defined above, R* is a linking moiety formed by the reaction of R
with a reactive moiety on the biologically-active compound or precursor thereof and B is a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
In another aspect, the invention relates to a composition comprising the product of the reaction of the compound of Formula VIII and a biologically-active compound or a precursor thereof.
In one embodiment, the composition has the structure according to Formula )(VIM

Formula XVIII:
I (C112)n.R, _____________________________ 0 where all variables are as defined above, R* is a linking moiety formed by the reaction of R
with a reactive moiety on the biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, and B is a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
In another aspect, the invention relates to a composition comprising the product of the reaction of the compound of Formula IX and a biologically-active compound or a precursor thereof.
In one embodiment, the composition has the structure according to Formula XIX:
Formula XIX:
_______________________________ (CH2)u __ 0¨ (CH2)n¨ CH¨R*
\B
where all variables are as defined above, R* is a linking moiety formed by the reaction of R
with a reactive moiety on the biologically-active compound or precursor thereof and B is a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
In another aspect, the invention relates to a composition comprising the product of the reaction of the compound of Formula X and a biologically-active compound or a precursor thereof.
In one embodiment, the composition has the structure according to Formula XXII:
Formula XXII:
where all variables are as defined above, R* is a linking moiety formed by the reaction of R with a reactive moiety on the biologically-active compound or precursor thereof; and B is a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
In another embodiment, the composition has the structure the structure according to Formula XXIV:
Formula XXIV:

B'¨R¨C11-1¨(C112),,¨(Y)õ,¨Q¨X¨CW2CW2¨(0-CH2CH2)a¨X--(CH2)n where all variables are as defined above, each W is, independently, hydrogen or a C1 to C7 alkyl. R* is a linking moiety formed by the reaction of R with a reactive moiety on the biologically-active compound, B, or precursor thereof, R** is a linking moiety formed by the reaction of R" with a reactive moiety on the biologically-active compound, B', or precursor thereof; and B and B' are, independently, a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
In some embodiments, B and B' are the same type of biologically-active compound. In other embodiments, B and B' are different biologically-active compounds. In still other embodiments, B and B' are the same biologically active molecule. In additional embodiments, R* and R** are the same. In other embodiments, R* and R** are different.
In other embodiments, the composition has the structure according to Formula )0CV:
Formula XXV:
B'¨R(CH2),¨X¨CW2CW2¨(0-CH2CHA¨X¨(CH2)õ
where all variables are as defined in claims above, each W is, independently, hydrogen or a C1 to C7 alkyl.
R* and R** are, independently, linking moieties formed from the reaction of R
and R"
with a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, and B and B' are each a biologically-active compound, or precursor thereof, after conjugation with R
and R", respectively.
In some embodiments, B and B' are the same type of biologically-active compound. In other embodiments, B and B' are different biologically-active compounds. In still other embodiments, B and B' are the same biologically active molecule. In additional embodiments, R* and R** are the same. In other embodiments, R* and R** are different.
In another aspect, the invention involves a method of treating a patient with a susceptible viral infection, comprising administering to the patient an effective amount of a composition having the structure according to Formula XIV:
Formula AV: -_____________________________________ (CH2)n __ C (CH2)E¨R*¨B
_ Z _ p wherein P is a polyalkylene glycol polymer;
X and Y are independently 0, S, CO, CO2, COS, SO, S02, CONR', SO2NR', or NR';
Q is a C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl (including fused bicyclic and bridged bicyclic ring structures), a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a Ct to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and alkylthio;
each R', Z and Z' is independently hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to Cg saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and alkylthio;
R* is a linking moiety;
B is a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof;
m is 0 or 1;
each n is 0 or an integer from 1 to 5; and pis 1, 2, or 3.
In a further aspect, the invention involves a method of treating a patient with a susceptible viral infection by administering to the patient an effective amount of a composition having the -structure according to Formula XlVa:
Formula X1Va:

P¨X¨Q ___________________________ (Y). __ (CH2)E¨CI-I¨R*¨B
wherein P is a polyalkylene glycol polymer, m is 0 or 1; and n is 0 or an integer from 1 to 5.
X and Y are independently 0, S, CO, CO2, cos, SO, SO2, CONR.', SO2NR', or NR';

and Q is a C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl (including fused bicyclic and bridged bicyclic ring structures), a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amid , amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, iii11110, silyl, ether, and alkylthio.
Each R' and Z is independently hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted allcaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroarornatie moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and alkylthio;
R* is a linking moiety formed from the reaction of R with a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, and B is a biologically-active compound, or precursor thereof, after conjugation with R.
In one embodiment, B is a biologically-active peptide such as interferon. For example, this interferon may be interferon-beta-1a.
In further embodiments, the composition also includes a biologically-active agent selected from the group consisting of a small molecule antiviral, a nucleic acid antiviral and a peptidic antiviral. For example, the antiviral agent may be selected from the group consisting of ribavirin, levovirin, 3TC, FTC, MB686, zidovudine, acyclovir, gancyclovir, viramide, VX-497, VX-950, and ISIS-14803.
In various embodiments, the viral infection in need of treatment is chronic hepatitis C.

("' In an additional aspect, the invention involves a method of treating a patient with a susceptible viral infection by administering to the patient an effective amount of a composition having the structure according to Formula XV:
Formula XV:
________________________________ T2 __ (Y)n __ (CHAT¨CH--R*¨B
P¨X¨ T1 wherein P is a polyallcylene glycol polymer; m is 0 or 1; d is 0 or an integer from 1 to 4;
n is 0 or an integer from 1 to 5; and X and Y are independently 0, S, CO, CO2, cos, SO, SO2, CONR', SO2NR', or NR'.
and T2 are, independently, absent, or a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, a C3 to Cg saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkatyl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhythyl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and alkylthio.
Each R' and Z is independently hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to Cg saturated or unsaturated cyclic allcyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formy1, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioforrnate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and alkylthio.
Each L is, independently, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thiofomiate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, arnido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and alkylthio;
R* is a linking moiety formed from the reaction of R with a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, and B is a biologically-active compound, or precursor thereof, after conjugation with R.
In various embodiments, B is a biologically-active peptide such as interferon.
For example, in one embodiment, B is interferon-beta-1a.
In another embodiment, the composition further contains a biologically-active agent selected from the group consisting of a small molecule antiviral, a nucleic acid antiviral and a peptidic antiviral. In other embodiments, the antiviral agent may be selected from the group consisting of ribavirin, levovirin, 3TC, FTC, MB686, zidovudine, acyclovir, gancyclovir, viramide, VX-497, VX-950, and ISIS-14803. In addition, the viral infection can be chronic hepatitis C.
In a further aspect, the invention involves a method of treating a patient with a susceptible viral infection by administering to the patient an effective amount of a composition having the structure according to Formula XVI:
Formula XVI
B
__________________________________ T2 (Y)na __ (CHO, P ¨X¨T1 where P is a polyalkylene glycol polymer, m is 0 or 1; d is 0 or an integer from 1 to 4; n is 0 or an integer from 1 to 5; X and Y are independently 0, S, CO, CO2, COS, SO, S02, CONR', SO2NR', or NR'; T1 and T2 are, independently, absent, or a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group; and each R' and Z is independently hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or nnsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group.

Each L is, independently, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to Cs saturated or =saturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thiofinmate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and allcylthio.
R* is a linking moiety formed from the reaction of R with a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, and B is a biologically-active compound, or precursor thereof, after conjugation with R.
In various embodiments, B is a biologically-active peptide such as interferon.
For example, B may be interferon-beta-1a.
In still further embodiments, the composition further contains a biologically-active = agent selected from the group consisting of a small molecule antiviral, a nucleic acid antiviral and a peptidic antiviral. For example, the antiviral agent may be selected from the group consisting of ribavirin, levovirin, 3TC, FTC, MB686, zidovudine acyclovir, gancyclovir, viramide, VX-497, VX-950, and ISIS-14803.
In another embodiment, the viral infection is chronic hepatitis C.
In a further aspect, the invention involves a method of treating a patient with a susceptible viral infection by administering to the patient an effective amount of a composition having the structure according to Formula )0C:
Formula XX:
(1_,)d )--R*=13 B'-12'LIT-(CH2),--(Y)õ,-,---Q-XCW2CW2(0-CH2CH2),¨X¨Ti wherein m is 0 or 1; d is 0 or an integer from 1 to 4; a is an integer from 4 to 10,000; and n is 0 or an integer from 1 to 5.
Each X and Y is independently 0, S, CO, CO2, COS, SO, S02, CONR', SO2NR', or _ NR'; T1 and T2 are, independently, absent, or a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group; each R' and Z is independently hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group; and each W is, independently, hydrogen or a C1 to C7 alkyl.
Each L is, independently, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated allcyl or heteroallcaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, arnido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonarnido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and alkylthio.
Q is a C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl (including fused bicyclic and bridged bicyclic ring structures), a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulthydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and alkylthio. -R* and R** are, independently, linking moieties formed from the reaction of R
and R"
with a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, and B and B' are each a biologicaIly-active compound, or precursor thereof, after conjugation with R
and R", respectively.
In some embodiments, B and B' are the same type of biologically-active compound. In other embodiments, B and B' are different biologically-active compounds. In still other embodiments, B and B' are the same biologically active molecule. In additional embodiments, R* and R** are the same. In other embodiments, R* and R** are different.
In various embodiments, B is a biologically-active peptide such as interferon.
For example, in one embodiment, B is interferon-beta-1a.
In other embodiments, the composition further contains a biologically-active agent selected from the group consisting of a small molecule antiviral, a nucleic acid antiviraiand a peptidic antiviral. For example, the antiviral agent may be selected from the group consisting of ribavirin, levovirin, 3TC, FTC, MB686, zidovudine, acyclovir, gancyclovir, viramide, VX-497, VX-950, and ISIS-14803.
In a further embodiment, the viral infection is chronic hepatitis C.
In a further aspect, the invention involves a method of treating a patient with a susceptible viral infection by administering to the patient an effective amount of a composition having the structure according to Formula XXL
Formula XXI:
(pd (012in R
13`----C11-1¨(CH2),TX¨CW2CW2(0-C112C1-12)a¨X¨Ti where m is 0 or 1; d is 0 or an integer from 1 to 4; a is an integer from 4 to 10,000; each n is 0 or an integer from 1 to 5; each X and Y is independently 0, S, CO, CO2, cos, SO, SO2, CONR', SO2NR', or NR'; T1 and T2 are, independently, absent, or a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group; each R' and Z is independently hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group; and each W is, independently, hydrogen or a C1 to C7 alkyl.
Each L is, independently, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated Ci to Cal alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to Cs saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted allcaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to 020 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralicyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and alkylthio.
R* and R** are, independently, linking moieties formed from the reaction of R
and R"
with a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, and B and 13' are each a biologically-active compound, or precursor thereof, after conjugation with R
and R", respectively.

In some embodiments, B and B' are the same type of biologically-active compound. In other embodiments, B and B' are different biologically-active compounds. In still other embodiments, B and B' are the same biologically active molecule. In additional embodiments, R* and R** are the same. In other embodiments, R* and R** are different.
In various embodiments, B is a biologically-active peptide such as an interferon. For example, B may be is interferon-beta-1a.
In another embodiment, the composition further contains a biologically-active agent selected from the group consisting of a small molecule antiviral, a nucleic acid antiviral and a peptidic antiviral. For example, the antiviral agent may be selected from the group consisting of ribavirin, levovirin, 3TC, FTC, MB686, zidovudine, acyclovir, gancyclovir, viramide, VX-497, VX-950, and ISIS-14803.
In a further embodiment, the viral infection is chronic hepatitis C.
In another aspect, the invention involves a method of treating a patient with a susceptible viral infection, comprising administering to the patient an effective amount of a composition having the structure according to Formula XXII:
Formula Val:
Z' -I
P¨X¨(CH2)õ C ____________________________ (CH2),3---R*-B
P
wherein P is a polyalkylene glycol polymer;
X is 0, S, CO, CO2, COS, SO, S02, CONR', SO2NR', or NR';
R' is hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or beteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, earboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thioearbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphozyl, phosphonate, phosphinate, aznino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and alkylthio;
each Z and Z' is independently hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocydyl, arallcyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and alkylthio provided that at least one Z or Z' is not hydrogen;
R* is a linking moiety;
B is a biologically-active molecule.
m is 0 or 1;
each n is 0 or an integer from 1 to 5; and pis 1, 2, or 3.
In still another aspect, the invention involves a method of treating a patient with a susceptible vfral infection, comprising administering to the patient an effective amount of a composition having the structure according to Formula XXIIa:
Formula XX:Ila:
p¨x¨(C112)n¨CH¨le¨B
where: P is a polyalkylene glycol polymer; m is 0 or 1; n is 0 or an integer from 1 to 5; X is 0, S, CO, 002, COS, SO, 502, CONR', SO2NR', or NR'; and R' is hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or beteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, pbosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and allcylthio.
Z is a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thiofounate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, arallcyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and alkylthio.
R* is a linking moiety formed from the reaction of R with a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, and B is a biologically-active compound, or precursor thereof, after conjugation with R.
In various embodiments, B is a biologically-active peptide such as interferon.
For example, B may be interferon-beta-1a.
In another embodiment, the composition further contains a biologically-active agent selected from the group consisting of a small molecule antiviral, a nucleic acid antiviral and a peptidic antiviral. For example, the antiviral agent may be selected from the group consisting of ribavirin, levovirin, 3TC, FTC, MB686, zidovudine, acyclovir, gancyclovir, viramide, VX-497, VX-950, and ISIS-14803.
In a further embodiment, the viral infection is chronic hepatitis C.
In yet another aspect, the invention involves a method of treating a patient with a susceptible viral infection by administering to the patient an effective amount of a composition having the structure according to Formula XXIV:
Formula X)CIV:
B
B'-R*=9"1-(CH2)õ--(Y)m-Q-X-CW2CW2-(0-CH2CH2L-X-(CH2)õ
where: m is 0 or 1; a is an integer from 4 to 10,000; each n is independently 0 or an integer from 1 to 5; each X and Y is independently 0, S, CO, CO2, COS, SO, SO2, CONR', SO2NR', or NR'; each R.' and Z is independently hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C/ to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group; and each W is, independently, hydrogen or a CI to C7 alkyl.
Q is a C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl (including fused bicyclic and bridged bicyclic ring structures), a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted allcaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, earboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphotyl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, anticline, irnine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and allcylthio.
R* and R** are, independently, linking moieties formed from the reaction of R
and R"
with a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, and B and B' are each a biologically-active compound, or precursor thereof, after conjugation with R
and R", respectively.
In some embodiments, B and B' are the same type of biologically-active compound. In other embodiments, B and B' are different biologically-active compounds. In still other embodiments, B and B' are the same biologically active molecule. in additional embodiments, R* and R** are the same. In other embodiments, R* and R** are different.
In various embodiments, B is a biologically-active peptide such as interferon.
For example, B may be interferon-beta-la.
In other embodiments, the composition further contains a biologically-active agent selected from the group consisting of a small molecule antiviral, a nucleic acid antiviral and a peptidic antiviral. For example, the antiviral agent may be selected from the group consisting of ribavirin, levovirin, 3TC, FTC, 1\0686, zido-vudine, acyclovir, gancyclovir, viramide, VX-497, VX-950, and ISIS-14803.
In still other embodiments, the viral infection is chronic hepatitis C.
In an additional aspect, the invention involves a method of treating a patient with a susceptible viral infection by administering to the patient an effective amount of a composition having the structure according to Formula XXV:
Formula )0CV:
B
R
CW2CW2- (0 -CH2CH2L-X- (CHA/
wherein each W is, independently, hydrogen or a C1 to C7 alkyl; a is an integer from 4 to 10,000; each n is independently 0 or an integer from 1 to 5; X is 0, S, CO, CO2, COS, SO, S02, CONR', SO2NR', or NR'; and each and Z is independently hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group.

R* and R** are, independently, linking moieties formed from the reaction of R
and R"
with a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, and B and B' are each a biologically-active compound, or precursor thereof, after conjugation with R
and R", respectively.
In some embodiments, B and B' are the same type of biologically-active compound. In other embodiments, B and B' are different biologically-active compounds. In still other embodiments, B and B' are the same biologically active molecule. In additional embodiments, R* and R** are the same. In other embodiments, R* and R** are different.
In various embodiments, B is a biologically-active peptide such as interferon.
For example, B may be interferon-beta-1a.
In another embodiment, the composition further contains a biologically-active agent selected from the group consisting of a small molecule antiviral, a nucleic acid antiviral and a peptidic antiviral. For example, the antiviral agent may be selected from the group consisting of ribavirin, levovirin, 3TC, FTC, MB686, zidovudine, acyclovir, gancyclovir, viramide, VX-497, VX-950, and ISIS-14803.
In still other embodiments, the viral infection is chronic hepatitis C.
The present invention is also concerned with a method of treating a patient suspected of having hepatitis C infection by administering to the patient a combination of any of the compositions of the invention and an antiviral agent. In various embodiments, the composition and the antiviral agent are administered simultaneously, sequentially, or alternatively.
In one embodiment, the antiviral agent is ribavirin.
In yet another aspect, the present invention provides a process for making a medicament for treatment of viral infections and autoimmune diseases comprising a compound of formula XXII
Formula XXII
Z' P¨X¨(CH2), C ___________ (CH2)¨R*¨B
- -P
wherein P is a polyalkylene glycol polymer; X is 0, S, CO, CO2, COS, SO, S02, CONR', SO2NR', or NR'; R' is hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a 01 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and alkylthio; each Z and Z' is independently hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and alkylthio, provided that at least one Z or Z' is not hydrogen; R* is a linking moiety; B is an interferon beta (IFN p); each n is 0 or an integer from 1 to 5; and p is 1, 2, or 3, comprising the following steps: (a) adding an activated polyalkylene glycol polymer to an IFN
P solution to form a mixture; and (b) reacting said activated polyalkylene glycol polymer with said IFN 13 in the presence of a reducing agent via reductive alkylation to form said compound of formula XXII.
Unless otherwise defined, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art to which this invention belongs. Although methods and materials similar or equivalent to those described herein can be used in the practice or testing of the present invention, suitable methods and materials are described below. In case of conflict, the present specification, including definitions, will control.
In addition, the materials, methods, and examples are illustrative only and not intended to be limiting.
Other features and advantages of the invention will be apparent from the following detailed description, and from the claims.
54a BRIEF Description of the DRAWINGS
The present invention will be further understood from the following description with reference to the tables, in which:
FIG. 1 is a reducing SDS-PAGE gel showing the purity of unmodified EN-13-la and 20 kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-P-la: Lane A: molecular weight markers (from top to bottom; 100 kDa, 68 kDa, 45 kDa, 27 kDa, and 18 kDa, respectively);
Lane B: 41.1g of unmodified IFN-13-1a; Lane C: 4 tg of 20 kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-B-la.
FIG. 2 depicts traces of the size exclusion chromatography of unmodified IFN-13-la and kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-P-la: Panel A: molecular weight standards; Panel B: 20 kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-13-1a;
Panel C, unmodified TN-P-la.
FIG. 3 is a trace of the size exclusion chromatography of 20 kDa mPEG-0-ni-15 methylpheny1-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified LEN-P-la.
FIG. 4 is a reducing SDS-PAGE gel showing the purity of unmodified IFN-13-1a and 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde-modified IFN-13-1a: Lane A: 2.5 jug of 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde-modified TN-13-1a; Lane B: 2.5 pg of unmodified WN-f3-1a; Lane C:
molecular weight markers (from top to bottom; 100 kDa, 68 kDa, 45 kDa, 27 kDa, and 18 kDa, 20 respectively).
FIG. 5 depicts traces of the size exclusion chromatography of 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde-modified IFN-13-1a; Panel A: molecular weight standards;
Panel B: 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde-modified IFN13-1a.
FIG. 6 is a reducing SDS-PAGE gel depicting the stability of 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde-modified ]FN-f3-la: Lane A: molecular weight markers (from top to bottom; 100 kDa, 68 kDa, 45 kDa, 27 kDa, 18 kDa, and 15 kDa, respectively);
Lanes B, C, D, and E: 2 lig of 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde-modified IFN-(3-1a removed for assay at day 0, 2, 5, and 7, respectively.
FIGS. 7A-B show the antiviral activity of various PEGylated human IFN-13-1a samples as a function of protein concentration: FIG. 7A; unmodified IFN-13-la (0), 20 kDa inPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-f3-la (0), 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-methylpheny1-0-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-13-la (A), and 20 kDa mPEG-0-rn-rnethy1pheny1-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-f3-la (0). FIG. 7B; unmodified IFN-13-la (0), 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde-modified IFN-P-la (0), 20 kDa inPEG-0-p-phenylpropionaldehyde-modified lFN-f3-1a (A), and 20 kDa mPEG-0-m-phenylacetaldehyde-modified IFN-f3-la (o).
FIGS. 8 Ä-B are graphs depicting the pharmacokinetics of unmodified and various PEGylated human a-N-(34a samples: FIG. 8A: Unmodified IFN13-la (upper panel) and IFN-p-la modified with 20 kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde (lower panel); FIG.
8B: IFN-13-1a modified with 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-metbylpheny1-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde (upper panel) and 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde (lower panel).
FIGS. 9 A-B are graphs depicting the pharmacokinetics of unmodified and various PEGylated human ]FN-J3-la samples: FIG. 9A: Unmodified IFN-13-la (upper panel) and IFN-p-la modified with 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylpropionaldehyde (lower panel); FIG.
9B: IFN-p-la modified with 20 kDa mPEG-0-m-phenylacetaldehyde (upper panel) and 20 kDa mPEG-0-m-methylpheny1-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde (lower panel).
FIG. 10 is a bar graph comparing a single administration of 20 kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-13-1a, with daily administration of unmodified IFN-f3-la at reducing the number of radially-oriented neovessels in nu/nu mice carrying human malignant melanoma cells: treatment with vehicle control once on day 1 only (bar A);
treatment with 1 MU (5 i_tg) of unmodified IFN-f3-la daily on days 1-9 inclusive (bar B);
treatment with 1 MU (10 AO of 20 kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified EFN-f3-1a once on day 1 only (bar C); and treatment with vehicle control daily on days 1-9 inclusive (bar D).
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
The invention is directed to compounds and methods useful in the treatment of various diseases and disorders. As explained in detail below, such diseases and disorders include, in particular, those which are susceptible to treatment with interferon therapy, including but not limited to viral infections such as hepatitis infections and autoimmune diseases such as multiple sclerosis.
The compounds of the invention include novel, activated polyalkylene glycol compounds according to Formula I:

Formula I:
P ¨X¨ Q __________________________ Min ___ (CH2)õ __ CH¨R
where P is a water soluble polymer such as a polyalkylene glycol polymer. A
non-limiting list of such polymers include other polyalltylene oxide homopolymers such as polypropylene glycols, polyoxyethylenated polyols, copolymers thereof and block copolymers thereof. Other examples of suitable water-soluble and non-peptidic polymer backbones include poly(oxyethylated polyol), poly(olefinic alcohol), poly(vinylpyrrolidone), poly(hydroxypropylmethacrylamide), poly(a-hydroxy acid), poly(vinyl alcohol), polyphosphazene, polyoxazoline, poly(N-actyloylmorpholine) and copolymers, terpolymers, and mixtures thereof. In one embodiment, the polymer backbone is poly(ethylene glycol) or monomethoxy polyethylene glycol (mPEG) having an average molecular weight from about 200 Da to about 400,000 Da. It should be understood that other related polymers are also suitable for use in the practice of this invention and that the use of the term PEG or poly(ethylene glycol) is intended to be inclusive and not exclusive in this respect. The term PEG includes poly(ethylene glycol) in any of its forms, including alkoxy PEG, difunctional PEG, multi-armed PEG, forked PEG, branched PEG, pendent PEG, or PEG with degradable linkages therein.
In the class of compounds represented by Formula I, there are between zero and five methylene groups between Y and the Z-containing carbon (e.g., n is zero or an integer from one to five) and m is zero or one, e.g., Y is present or absent.
X and Y are, independently, 0, S, CO, CO2, cos, SO, SO2, CONR.', SO2NR', or NR'.
In some embodiments, X and Y are oxygen.
Q is a C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl (including fused bicyclic and bridged bicyclic ring structures), a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted allcaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group. The substituents can be halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, sulfamoyl, sulfonate, silyl, ether, or alkyltbio.
The Z substituent is hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 tO Cs saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heterealkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to Cal saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group. The substituents can be halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioforrnate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, sulfamoyl, sulfonate, silyl, ether, or alkylthio.
When X or Y is NR', R' can be hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated Ci to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, a C3 to Cs saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl, wherein the alkyl is a C1 to Cal saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group. The substituents can be halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfaydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, sulfamoyl, sulfonate, silyl, ether, or alkylthio.
R is a reactive functional group, i.e., an activating moiety capable of reacting to form a linkage or a bond between the compound of Formula I and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof. Thus, R represents the "activating group" of the activated polyalkylene glycol compounds (PGCs) represented by Formula I. R can be, for example, a carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocy-anate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxicie, hydroxysuccinirnidyl, azole, rnaleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, or glyoxal. In particular embodiments, R is an aldehyde hydrate.
Specific examples of R in the literature include N-succinimidyl carbonate (see e.g., U.S. Patent Nos. 5,281,698, 5,468,478), amine (see e.g., Buckmann et al.
Makromol. Chem.
182:1379 (1981), Zaplipsky et al. Eur. Polyrn. J. 19:1177 (1983)), hydrazide (See, e.g., Andresz et al. Makromol. Chem. 179:301 (1978)), succinimidyl propionate and succinimidyl butanoate (see, e.g. Olson et al. in .Poly (ethylene glycol) Chenzistry &
Biological Applications, pp 170-181, Harris & Zaplipsky Eds., ACS, Washington, DC, 1997; see also U.S.
Patent No.
5,672,662), succinimidyl succinate (See. e.g., Abuchowski et al. Cancer Biochenz. Biophys.
7:1'75 (1984) and Joppich et al. Macrolol. Chem. 180:1381(1979), succinimidyl ester (see, e.g., U.S. Patent No. 4,670,417), benzotriazole carbonate (see, e.g., U.S. Patent No. 5 5,650,234), glycidyl ether (see, e.g., Pitha et al. Eui J Biothem. 94:11(1979), Ening et al., Biotech. Appl.
Biochem. 13:354 (1991), oxycarbonylimidazole (see, e.g. Beauchamp, et al., Anal. Biochem.
131:25 (1983). Tondelli et al. J. Controlled Release 1:251 (1985)), p-nitrophenyl carbonate (see, e.g., Veronese, et al., Appl. Biochenz. Biotech., 11:141 (1985); and Sartore et al., Appl.
Biothem. Biotech.. 27:45 10 (1991)), aldehyde (see, e.g., Harris et al. J.
Polynz. Sci. Chem. Ed.
22:341 (1984), U.S. Patent No. 5,824,784, U.S. Patent 5,252,714), rnaleimide (see, e.g., Goodson et al. Bio/Technology 8:343 (1990), Romani et al. M Chemistry of Peptides and Proteins 2:29 (1984)), and Kogan, Synthetic Comm. 22:2417 (1992)), orthopyridyl-disulfide (see, e.g., Woghiren, et al. Bioconj. Chem. 4:314 (1993)), acrylol (see, e.g., Sawhney 15 et al., Macromolecules, 26:581 (1993)), vinylsulfone (see, e.g., U.S. Patent No.
5,900,461). In addition, two molecules of the polymer of this invention can also be linked to the amino acid lysine to form a di-substituted lysine, which can then be further activated with N-hydroxysuccinimide to form an active N-succinimidyl moiety (see, e.g., U.S.
Patent No.
5,932,462).
The terms "functional group", "active moiety", "active group", "activating group", "activating moiety", "reactive site", "chemically-reactive group" and"
chemically-reactive moiety" are used in the art and herein to refer to distinct, definable portions or units of a molecule. The terms are somewhat synonymous in the chemical arts and are used herein to indicate the portions of molecules having a characteristic chemical activity and which are typically reactive with other molecules. The term "active," when used in conjunction with functional groups, is intended to include those functional groups that react readily with electrophilic or nucleophilic groups on other molecules, in contrast to those groups that require strong catalysts or highly impractical reaction conditions in order to react.
For example, as would be understood in the art, the term "active ester" would include those esters that react readily with nucleophilic groups such as amines. Typically, an active ester will react with an amine in aqueous medium in a matter of minutes, whereas certain esters, such as methyl or ethyl esters, require a strong catalyst in order to react with a nucleophilic group.
In the compounds of the invention as defined above, the functional group R
becomes a linking moiety, R*, after it has reacted with a biologically-active molecule to form a linkage or bond between the activated polyalkylene glycol compound (PGC) and the biologically-active compound. Thus, B is a biologically-active compound after conjugation to the PGC and R* is = a moiety formed by the reaction of R on the activated PGC with one or more reactive functional groups on the biologically-active compound, B, such that a single covalent attachment results between the PGC and biologically-active compound. In a preferred embodiment, R* is a moiety formed by the reaction of R on the activated. PGC
with a single reactive functional group on the biologically-active compound, such that a covalent attachment results between the activated polyalkylene glycol compound (PGC) and the biologically-active compound.
The biologically-active compound or precursor thereof (B) is preferably not adversely affected by the presence of the PGC. Additionally, B either naturally has a functional group which is able to react with and form a linkage with the activated PGC, or is modified to contain such a reactive group.
As used herein, a precursor of B is an inactive or less active form of B that changes to the active or more active form, respectively, upon contact with physiological conditions, e.g., administration to a subject. Such changes can be conformational or structural changes, including, but not limited to, changing from a protected form to a non-protected form of B. As used herein, such change does not include release of the conjugated PGCs of this invention.
As would be understood in the art, the term "protected" refers to the presence of a protecting group or moiety that prevents reaction of the chemically-reactive functional group under certain reaction conditions. The protecting group will vary depending on the type of chemically-reactive group being protected. For example, if the chemically-reactive group is an amine or a hydrazide, the protecting group can be selected from the group of tert-butyloxycarbonyl (t-Boc) and 9-fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl (Frnoc). If the chemically-reactive group is a thiol, the protecting group can be orthopyridyldisulfide. If the chemically-reactive group is a carboxylic acid, such as butanoic or propionic acid, or a hydroxyl group, the protecting group can be benzyl or an alkyl group such as methyl or ethyl.
Other protecting groups known in the art may also be used in the invention.
The terms "linking moiety", "linkage" or "linker" are used herein to refer to moieties or bonds that are formed as the result of a chemical reaction and typically are covalent linkages.
Thus, the linkage represented by bond R*-B in the above formulae results from the reaction between an activated moiety, R, on the PGC with a biologically-active compound, i.e., B'. R*
is the linking moiety formed from R upon reaction with B', and B is the biologically-active compound as conjugated to the PGC by reaction of a functional group on B' with R.
As used herein, the term "biologically-active compound" refers to those compounds that exhibit one or more biological responses or actions when administered to a subject and contain reactive groups that contain reactive moieties that are capable of reacting with and conjugating to at least one activated PGC of the invention. The term "biologically-active molecule", "biologically-active moiety" or "biologically-active agent" when used herein means any substance which can affect any physical or biochemical properties of any subject, including but not limited to viruses, bacteria, fungi, plants, animals, and humans. In particular, as used herein, biologically-active molecules include any substance intended for diagnosis, cure, mitigation, treatment, or prevention of disease in humans or other animals, or to otherwise enhance physical or mental well-being of humans or animals.
Examples of biologically-active molecules include, but are not limited to, peptides, peptide analogs, proteins, enzymes, small molecules, dyes, lipids, nucleosides, oligonucleotides, analogs of oligonucleotides, sugars, oligosaccharides, cells, viruses, liposomes, microparticles, surfaces and micelles.
Classes of biologically-active agents that are suitable for use with the invention include, but are not limited to, chemokines, lymphokines, antibodies, soluble receptors, anti-tumor agents, anti-anxiety agents, hormones, growth factors, antibiotics, fungicides, fungistatic agents, anti-viral agents, steroidal agents, antimicrobial agents, germicidal agents, antipyretic agents, antidiabetic agents, bronchodilators, antidiarrheal agents, coronary dilation agents, glycosides, spasmolytics, antihypertensive agents, antidepressants, antianxiety agents, other psychotherapeutic agents, corticosteroids, analgesics, contraceptives, nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs, blood glucose lowering agents, cholesterol lowering agents;
anticonvulsant agents, other antiepileptic agents, immunomodulators, anticholinergics, syrnpatholytics, sympathomimetics, vasodilatory agents, anticoagulants, antiarrhythmics, prostaglandins having various pharmacologic activities, diuretics, sleep aids, antihistaminic agents, antineoplastic agents, oncolytic agents, antiandrogens, antimalarial agents, antileprosy agents, and various other types of drugs. See Goodman and Giliman's The Basis of Therapeutics (Ninth Edition, Pergamon Press, Inc., USA, 1996) and The Merck Index (Thirteenth Edition, Merck & Co., Inc., USA, 2001).
Biologically-active compounds include any compound that exhibits a biological response in its present form, or any compound that exhibits a biological response as a result of a chemical conversion of its structure from its present form. For example, biologically-active compounds will include any compound that contains a protective group that, when cleaved, results in a compound that exhibits a biological response. Such cleavage can be the result, for example, of an in vivo reaction of the compound with endogenous enzymes or a pre-administration reaction of the compound, including its reaction with the activated PGCs of this invention. As a further example, biologically-active compounds will also include any compound which undergoes a stereotransformation, in vivo or ex vivo, to form a compound that exhibits a biological response or action.
Biologically-active compounds typically contain several reactive sites at which covalent attachment of the activated PGC is feasible. For example, amine groups can undergo acylations, sulfhydryl groups can undergo addition reactions and allcylations, carbonyl and carboxyl groups can undergo acylations, and aldehyde and hydroxyl groups can undergo amination and reductive amination. One or more of these reactions can be used in the preparation of the polyallcylene glycol-modified biologically-active compounds of the invention. In addition, biologically-active compounds can be modified to form reactive moieties on the compound that facilitate such reactions and the resultant conjugation to the activated PGC.
Those of ordinary skill will recognize numerous reaction mechanisms available to facilitate conjugation of the activated PGC to a biologically-active compound.
For example, when the activating moiety, R, is a hydrazide group, it can be covalerxtly coupled to sulfhydryl, sugar, and carbonyl moieties on the biologically-active compounds (after these moieties undergo oxidation to produce aldehydes). The reaction of hydrazide activating moieties (R) with aldehydes on biologically-active compounds (B') creates a hydrazone linkage (R*-B).
When R. is a maleimide group, it can be reacted with a sulfhydryi group to form a stable thioether linkage. If sulfhydryls are not present on the biologically-active compound, they may be created through disulfide reduction or through thiolation with 2-iminothiolane or SATA.
When R is an imidoester it will react with primary amines on B' to form an imidoamide linkage. Imidoester conjugation is usually performed between pH 8.5-9Ø When connecting the activated PGCs to biologically-active proteins, imidoesters provide an advantage over other R groups since they do not affect the overall charge of the protein. They carry a positive charge at physiological pH, as do the primary amines they replace. Imidoester reactions are carried out between 0 C and room temperature (e.g., at 4 C), or at elevated temperatures under anhydrous conditions. When R is an NHS-ester, its principal target is primary amines.
Accessible a.-amine groups, for example those present on the N-termini of peptides and proteins, react with NHS-esters to fonn a covalent amide bond.
In some embodiments, R*-B is a hydrolytically-stable linkage. A hydrolytically stable linkage means that the linkage is substantially stable in water and does not react with water at useful pHs, e.g., the linkage is stable under physiological conditions for an extended period of time, perhaps even indefinitely. In other embodiments, R*-B is a hydrolytically-unstable or degradable linkage. A hydrolytically-unstable linkage means that the linkage is degradable in water or in aqueous solutions, including for example, blood. Enzymatically-unstable or degradable linkages also means that the linkage can be degraded by one or more enzymes.
As understood in the art, polyalkylene and related polymers may include degradable linkages in the polymer backbone or= in the linker group between the polymer backbone and one or more of the terminal functional groups of the PGC molecule. For example, ester linkages formed:by the reaction of, e.g., PGC carboxylic acids or activated PGC carboxylic acids with alcohol groups on a biologically-active compound generally hydrolyze under physiological conditions to release the agent. Other hydrolytically-degradable linkages include carbonate linkages; imine linkages resulted from reaction of an amine and an aldehyde (See, e.g., Ouchi et al., Polymer Preprints, 38(1):582-3 (1997)); phosphate ester linkages formed by reacting an alcohol with a phosphate group; acetal linkages that are the reaction product of an = aldehyde and an alcohol; orthoester linkages that are the reaction product of a formate and an alcohol; peptide linkages formed by an amine group, e.g., at an end of a the PGC, and a carboxyl group of a peptide; and oligonucleotide linkages formed by a phosphoramidite group, e.g., at the end of a polymer, and a 5' hydroxyl group of an oligonucleotide.
The polyalkylene glycol, P, can be polyethylene glycol, having the structure of Formula Formula II:
E-(0-CH2CH2)a-, wherein a is an integer from 4 to 10,000 and E is hydrogen or a straight- or branched-chain Ci to C20 alkyl group, a detectable label, or a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula I and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
Thus, when E is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula I and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, E can be a carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinimidyl, azole, maleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, or glyoxal. It is to be understood that E
should be compatible with R so that reaction between E and R does not occur.
By "detectable label" is meant any label capable of detection. Non-limiting examples include radioactive isotopes, fluorescent moieties, phosphorescent moieties, cherniluminescent moieties, and quantum dots. Other detectable labels include biotin, cysteine, histidine, haemagglutinin, myc or flag tags.
In some embodiments, E has the structure according to Formula III or Formula IV:
Formula TIT
R"--HC¨(C112) ____________________ (Y)m¨ Q ¨X¨CW2CW2--Formula IV
121"¨HC¨(CH2)õ ___________________________ X CW2CW2--Each Q, X, Y, Z, m, and 11 are as defined above, and each W is, independently, hydrogen or a C1 to C7 alkyl.
In this class of compounds, R" is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula III and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof; and R' is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula IV and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
R" and R" can be of carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinimidyl, azole, maleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, or glyoxal. It is to be understood that R" and R'" should be compatible with R so that reaction with R does not occur.
As used herein, R" and R", upon conjugation to a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, form linking moieties as defined above. Thus, R** is a linking moiety formed by the reaction of the R" or R' group on the activated PGC with a reactive functional group on the biologically-active compound, such that a covalent attachment results between the PGC and the biologically-active compound. R and R" or R' can be the same moiety or different moieties, and the biologically-active compound bound to each can be the same or different.
As used herein, the term "alkyl" refers to the radical of saturated aliphatic groups, including straight-chain alkyl groups, branched-chain alkyl groups, cycloalkyl (alicyclic) groups, alkyl substituted cycloalkyl groups, and cycloalkyl substituted alkyl groups. In preferred embodiments, a straight chain or branched chain alkyl has 30 or fewer carbon atoms in its backbone (e.g., CI-Cm) for straight chain, C3-C30 for branched chain), and more preferably 20 or fewer. Likewise, preferred cycloalkyls have from 3-10 carbon atoms in their ring structure, and more preferably have 5, 6, or 7 carbons in the ring structure.
Moreover, the term "alkyl" (or "lower alkyl") is intended to include both "unsubstituted alkyls" and "substituted alkyls", the latter of which refers to alkyl moieties having substituents replacing a hydrogen on one or more carbons of the hydrocarbon backbone. Such substituents can include, for example, a halogen, a hydroxyl, a carbonyl (such as a carboxyl, an alkoxycarbonyl, a forrnyl, or an acyl), a thiocarbonyl (such as a thioester, a thioacetate, or a thioformate), an alkoxyl, a phosphoryl, a phosphonate, a phosphinate, an amino, an amido, an amidine, an imine, a cyano, a nitro, an azido, a sulfhydryl, an alkylthio, a sulfate, a sulfonate, a sulfamoyl, a sulfonamido, a sulfonyl, a heterocyclyl, an aralkyl, or an aromatic or heteroaromatic moiety. It will be understood by those skilled in the art that the moieties substituted on the hydrocarbon chain can themselves be substituted, if appropriate. For instance, the substituents of a substituted alkyl may include substituted and unsubstituted forms of amino, azido, imino, amido, phosphoryl (including phosphonate and phosphinate), sulfonyl (including sulfate, sulfonamido, sulfamoyl, and sulfonate), and silyl groups, as well as ethers, alkylthios, carbonyls (including ketones, aldehydes, carboxylates, and esters), -CF3, -CN and the like. Cycloalkyls can be further substituted with alkyls, alkenyls, alkoxys, alkylthios, aminoalkyls, carbonyl-substituted alkyls,-CF3, -CN, and the like.
The term "aralkyl", as used herein, refers to an alkyl group substituted with an aryl group (e.g., an aromatic or heteroaromatic group). Exemplary aralkyl groups include, but are not limited to, benzyl and more generally (CH2)Ph, where Ph is phenyl or substituted phenyl, and n is 1, 2, or 3.
The terms "alkenyl" and "alkynyl" refer to unsaturated aliphatic groups analogous in length and possible substitution to the alkyls described above, but that contain at least one double or triple bond, respectively.
Unless the number of carbons is otherwise specified, "lower alkyl" as used herein means an alkyl group, as defined above, but having from one to ten carbons, more preferably from one to six carbon atoms in its backbone structure. Likewise, "lower alkenyl" and "lower alkynyl" have similar chain lengths. Preferred alkyl groups are lower alkyls.
In preferred embodiments, a substituent designated herein as alkyl is a lower alkyl.
The term "aryl" as used herein includes 5-, 6-, and 7-membered single-ring aromatic groups that may include from zero to four heteroatorns, for example, benzene, pyrrole, furan, thiophene, imidazole, oxazole, thiazole, triazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine and ( I
pyrimidine, and the like. Those aryl groups having heteroatorns in the ring structure may also be referred to as "aryl heterocycles" or "heteroaromatics." The aromatic ring can be substituted at one or more ring positions with such substituents as described above, for example, halogen, azide, alkyl, aralkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyl, alkoxyl, amino, nitro, sulfhydryl, imino, amido, phosphonate, phosphinate, carbonyl, carboxyl, silyl, ether, alkylthio, sulfonyl, sulfonamido, ketone, aldehyde, ester, heterocyclyl, aromatic or heteroarornatic moieties, -CF3, -CN, or the like. The term "aryl" also includes polycyclic ring systems having two or more cyclic rings in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings (the rings are "fused rings") wherein at least one of the rings is aromatic, e.g., the other cyclic rings can be cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls, and/or heterocyclyls.
The terms ortho, meta and para apply to 1,2-, 1,3-, and 1,4-disubstituted benzenes, respectively. For example, the names 1,2-dimethylbenzene and ortha-dirnethylberizene are synonymous.
The terms "heterocyclyl' or "heterocyclic group" refer to 3- to 10-membered ring structures, more preferably 3- to 7-membered rings, whose ring structures include one to four heteroatoms. Heterocycles can also be polycycles. Heterocyclyl groups include, for example, thiophene, thianthrene, furan, pyran, isobenzofinun, chromene, xanthene, phenoxathiin, pyrrole, imidazole, pyrazole, isothiazole, isoxazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyrida7ine, indolizine, isoindole, indole, indazole, purine, quinolizine, isoquinoline, quinoline, phthalazine, naphthyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, chmoline, pteridine, carbazole, carboline, phenanthridine, acridine, pyrimidine, phenanthroline, phenazine, phenarsazine, phenothiazine, furazan, phenoxazine, pyrrolidine, oxolane, thiolane, oxazole, piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, lactones, lactams such as azetidinones and pyrrolidinones, sultams, sultones, and the like. The heterocyclic ring can be substituted at one or more positions with substituents as described above, such as, for example, halogen, alkyl, aralkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, sulfhydryl, imino, amido, phosphonate, phosphinate, carbonyl, carboxyl, silyl, ether, allcylthio, sulfonyl, ketone, aldehyde, ester, a heterocyclyl, an aromatic or heteroarornatic moiety, -CF3, -CN, or the like.
The term "carbocycle", as used herein, refers to an aromatic or non-aromatic ring in which each atom of the ring is carbon.
Heterocycles and carbocycles include fused bicyclic and bridged bicyclic ring structures.

As used herein, the term "nitro" means -NO2; the term "halogen" designates -F, -CI, -Br or -1; the term "sulfhydryl" means -SH; the term "hydroxyl" means -OH; and the term "sulfonyl" means -S02-.
The terms "amine" and "amino" are art-recognized and refer to both unsubstituted and substituted amines, e.g., a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:
R ' 10 /10 +
¨N ¨N--R10 \ R9 Or wherein Rg, R10 and R'10 each independently represent a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, -(CH2)m-R8, or R9 and R10 taken together with the N atom to which they are attached complete a heterocycle having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ring structure; R8 represents an aryl, a cycloalkyl, a cycloalkenyl, a heterocycle or a polycycle; and m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
The term "alkylamine" as used herein means an amine group, as defined above, having a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl attached thereto, i.e., at least one of R9 and R10 is an alkyl group.
The term "acylamino" is art-recognized and refers to a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:

________________ R,,i wherein R9 is as defined above, and Rill represents a hydrogen, an allgl, an a1kenyl or -(CH2)nrR8, where m and R8 are as defined above.
The term "amido" is art-recognized as an amino-substituted carbonyl and includes a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:
R., /
¨10 wherein Rg, R10 are as defined above. Preferred embodiments of the amide will not include imides which may be unstable.
The term "arnidine" is art-recognized as a group that can be represented by the.general formula:

N./ Rio wherein Rg, R10 are as defined above.
The term "guanidine" is art-recognized as a group that can be represented by the general formula:
NR, wherein Rg, R10 are as defined above.
The term "alkylthio" refers to an alkyl group, as defined above, having a sulfur radical attached thereto. In preferred ernbodiments, the "alkylthio" moiety is represented by one of -S-alkyl, -S-alkenyl, -S-alkynyl, and -S-(C112)m-R8, wherein m and R8 are defined above.
Representative alkylthio groups include methylthio, ethylthio, and the like.
The term "carbonyl" is art-recognized and includes moieties that can be represented by the general formula:

I I R
or X I I R'11 wherein X is a bond or represents an oxygen or a sulfur, and R11 represents a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, -(C112)m-R8 or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt, R'il represents a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl or -(CH2)m-18, where m and R8 are as defined above. Where X is an oxygen and R11 or R'11 is not hydrogen, the formula represents an "ester". Where X is an oxygen, and R11 is as defined above, the moiety is referred to herein as a carboxyl group, and particularly when R11 is a hydrogen, the formula represents a "carboxylic acid". Where X is an oxygen, and R'il is hydrogen, the formula represents a "formate". In general, where the oxygen atom of the above formula is replaced by sulfur, the formula represents a "thiolcarbonyl" group. Where X is a sulfur and R11 or R'11 is not hydrogen, the formula represents a "thioester." Where X is a sulfur and R1/ is hydrogen, the formula represents a "thiocarboxylic acid." Where X is a sulfur and R'11 is hydrogen, the formula represents a "thioformate." On the other hand, where X is a bond, and R11 is not hydrogen, the above formula represents a "ketone" group. Where X is a bond, and R11 is hydrogen, the above formula represents an "aldehyde" group.
The terms "alkoxyl" or "alkoxy" as used herein refers to an alkyl group, as defined above, having an oxygen radical attached thereto. Representative alkoxyl groups include methoxy, ethoxy, propyloxy, tert-butoxy, and the like. An "ether" is two hydrocarbons covalently linked by an oxygen. Accordingly, the substituent of an alkyl that renders that alkyl an ether is or resembles an alkoxyl, such as can be represented by one of -0-alkyl, -0-alkenyI, -0-(CH2)m-R8, where m and R8 are described above.
The tenn "sulfonate" is art-recognized and includes a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:

I I
¨s¨ OR4, I I

in which Reti is an electron pair, hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, or aryl.
The term "sulfate" is art recognized and includes a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:

¨0¨s¨ OR4, I I

in which R4.1 is as defined above.
The term "sulfonamido" is art recognized and includes a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:

I I
¨N¨S-R ' ' 0 in which R9 and R'11 are as defined above.
The term "sulfamoyl" is art-recognized and includes a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:
011 /Ric 0 \R9 in which R9 and R10 are as defined above.

The term "sulfonyl", as used herein, refers to a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:
o I I
¨S¨R
o in which R44 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryI.
The term "sulfoxido" as used herein, refers to a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:
o
11 in which R44 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, allcynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, or aryl.
It will be understood that "substitution" or "substituted vvith" includes the implicit proviso that such substitution is in accordance with permitted valence of the substituted atom and the substituent, and that the substitution results in a stable compound, e.g., which does not spontaneously undergo transformation such as by rearrangement, cyclization, elimination, etc.
As used herein, the term "substituted" is contemplated to include all permissible substituents of organic compounds. In a broad aspect, the permissible substituents include acyclic and cyclic, branched and unbranched, carbocyclic and heterocyclic, aromatic and nonaromatic substituents of organic compounds. Illustc: tive substituents include, for example, those described herein above. The permissible substituents can be one or more and the same or different for appropriate organic compounds. For pmposes of this invention, the heteroatoms such as nitrogen may have hydrogen substituents and/or any permissible substituents of organic compounds described herein which satisfy the valences of the heteroatoms. This invention is not intended to be limited in any manner by the permissible substituents of organic compounds.
A comprehensive list of the abbreviations utilized by organic chemists of ordinary skill in the art appears in the first issue of each volume of the Journal of Organic Chemistry; this list is typically presented in a table entitled Standard List of Abbreviations.
In some embodiments, the compounds of the invention have the structure according to Forrnula V:

Formula V
_____________________________________ T2-- (Y)m __ (CH2)1T¨CH---R
x¨ r1 (L)d X, Y, m, n, Z, and R' are as defined above, and R is an activating moiety as defined above, suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula V and a biologically-active compound or precursor. In particular embodiments, R is an aldehyde hydrate.
P is as defined above, and can be represented by Formula II
Formula H:
E-(0-CH2C112)a-, where E is as described above, and in some embodiments, can be represented by Formula III or IV.
T1 and T2 are, independently, absent, or a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, a C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group. The substituents can be halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, fonnyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, 'sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, or alkylthio.
When d is zero, there are no additional substituents (L) on the aromatic ring.
When d is an integer from 1 to 4, the substituents (L) can be a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated CI to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group. The substituents can be halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioforrnate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, hnine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, or alkylthio.
When R is an aldehyde, the compounds fall within those represented by Formtila: VI:

Formula VI
(L)d H
__________________________________ T2¨(Y)m ____ TT

P¨X¨Ti where all other variables are as defined above.
For example, when X and Y are oxygen and R is an aldehyde, the compounds of the invention are represented by compound J.
Compound J
__________________________________ T2 0-----(CH2)õ H
0 , where the T1 and T2 substituents can be in the ortho, meta, or para arrangement.
Where theTi and T2 substituents are straight-chain alkyl groups, and d is zero, the compounds are represented by Formula IX:
Formula IX:
______________________________ (CH2)u 0 (CH2)n CH _______ o---(CH 2)u where each u is independently zero or an integer from one to five and all other variables are as defined above. In particular embodiments, Z is hydrogen or methyl.
Particular classes of compounds falling within Formula ix can be represented by Formulae VII and VIII:
Formula VII:
____________________________________ (CH2),(LY

Formula VIII:

¨4¨(CH2)n_f.
____________________________ 0 H
Some representative activated polyalkylene glycol compounds include the following, where the polyalkylene glycol polymer is PEG or mPEG:
cn3 0 PEG,o 0 0 PEG a's---.1-f=CH113 PEG..õ.0 PEG''.o 10 =

PEG

=
In some embodiments, the compounds of the invention are represented by Formula X:
Formula X:
p¨x¨(C1-12)n¨ CH ¨R

where, as above, n is zero or an integer from one to five, and X is 0, S, CO, CO2, cos, SO, S02, CONR', SO2NR', or NR'.
When X is NR', R' can be hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to 020 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to Cs saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted allcaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioforrnate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amidb,-amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfarnoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, intim, silyl, ether, or alkylthio. Z can be a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated CI
to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group. When present, the substituents can be halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, or alkylthio.
As defined above, R is an activating moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula X and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
In some embodiments, R is an aldehyde hydrate.
P is a polyalkylene glycol polymer as defined above, and can be represented by Formula II:
Formula II:
E-(0-CH2CH2)-where E and a are as described above, and in some embodiments, can be represented by Formula III or IV. In some embodiments, E is methyl, and, therefore, P is mPEG.
When R is an aldehyde and X is oxygen, the compounds fall within the structure according to Formula XI:
Formula XE:

where P, Z and n are as defined for Formula X.
When P is mPEG, the compounds are described by Formula XII:
Formula XII:

CH3 (Ocii2cH0a0¨(0H2),---)\

and when n is one and Z is methyl, the compound is represented by Formula XIII:
Formula XIII:

CH3 (OCH2C112),OH
wherein a is an integer from 4 to 10,000.
Examples of synthetic pathways for making compounds according to the invention are set forth in the Examples below.
The invention also includes compositions of the activated polyallcylene glycol compounds (PGCs) of the invention and one or more biologically-active compounds. As described above, biologically-active compounds are those compounds that exhibit a biological response or action when administered to a subject. Unconjugated biologically-active compounds may be administered to a subject in addition to the compounds of the invention.
Additionally, biologically-active compounds may contain reactive groups that are capable of reacting with and conjugating to at least one activated PGC of the invention.
The invention also includes conjugates of the novel PGCs with biologically-active compounds. In one embodiment, the conjugates are formed from a compound of Formula I
and a biologically-active compound (B) and are described according to Formula XIV:
Formula XEV:
P Xrir= (CI-12),7¨CH¨R*¨B
As above, m is zero or one so that Y is present or absent, n is zero or an integer from one to five, and X and Y are independently 0, S, CO, CO2, cos, SO, SO2, CONR', SO2NR', or NR'.
Q is a C3 to Cs saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl (including fused bicyclic and bridged bicyclic ring structures), a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group. When present, the substituents can be halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, or alkylthio.
Each R' and Z is independently hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated CI to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to Cg saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroallcy1, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a CI to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, fonnyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioforrnate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyi, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and allcylthio;
R* is a linking moiety formed from the reaction of R with a corresponding functional group on the biologically-active compound, B, as described above. For example, R* is formed from the reaction of a moiety such as a carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinimidyl, azole, maleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, or glyoxal functionality with a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
P is a polyalkylene glycol polymer as defined above, and can be represented by Fonnula 11:
Formula II:
E-(0-CH2CH2)a-, where E is hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain Ci to C20 alkyl group (e.g., methyl), a detectable label, or a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula XIV and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof. As above, a is an integer from 4 to 10,000.
Where E is a detectable label, the label can be, for example, a radioactive isotope, a fluorescent moiety, a phosphorescent moiety, a chemiluminescent moiety, or a quantum dot.
When E is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula XEV and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, E can form a bond to another molecule of the biologically-active compound (B) so that the activated polyallcylene glycol compound is bound at either terminus to a molecule of the same type of biologically-active compound, to produce a dimer of the molecule.
In some embodiments, E forms a bond to a biologically-active compound other than B, creating a heterodimer of biologically-active compounds or precursors thereof.
In other embodiments, E forms an additional bond to the biologically-active compound, B, such that both E and R are bound through different functional groups of the same molecule of the biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
When E is capable of forming a bond to a biologically-active molecule or precursor thereof, E can be the same as or different from R and is chosen from carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, aerylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinimidyl, azole, maleirnide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, and glyoxal moieties.
When E is capable of forming a bond to a biologically-active molecule or precursor thereof, E can have the structure according to Formula III or Formula IV:
Formula III
R"¨HC¨(CH2) Q¨X¨ CW2CW2-Formula IV
R"1¨HC¨(CH2 where each Q, X, Y, Z, m, and n are, independently, as defined above, each W
is, independently, hydrogen or a Ci to C7 alkyl, R" is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula III and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, and R" is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula TV
and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
R" and R" are, independently chosen from carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyI, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hyciroxysuccinimidyl, azole, maleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinyisulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, and glyoxal moieties.
When Q in Formula XIV is a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl, the conjugate is formed from an activated polyalkylene glycol of Formula V and a biologically-active molecule (B), and is described according to Formula XV:
Formula XV
________________________________ T2-(Y) _____ (CH2),T--C11----R*¨B
P ____________ X
where T1 and T2 are, independently, absent, or a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, a C3 to Cs saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroallcaryl group. When present, the substituents can be halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosplainate, amino, anaido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroarornatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, or alkylthio. In some embodiments, T1 and T2, if present, are straight- or branched-chain saturated or unsaturated or C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group.
d is zero (e.g., there are no L substituents on the aromatic ring) or an integer from]. to 4. Each L is, when present, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or virtsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to Cs saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group. The substituents can be halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formy1, acyI, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonarnido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, or allcylthio.

All other variables are as described above, including P, which is a poIyalkylene glycol polymer, and can be represented by Formula II:
Formula II:
E-(0-CH2C112)a-, where E is hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain CI to C20 alkyl group (e.g.) methyl), a detectable label; or a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula XV and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof. As above, a is an integer from 4 to 10,000.
Where E is a detectable label, the label can be, for example, a radioactive isotope, a fluorescent moiety, a phosphorescent moiety, a chemiluminescent moiety, or a quantum dot.
When E is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula XV, and a biologically-active compound, B, E can form a bond to another molecule of the biologically-active compound (13) so that the activated polyalkylene glycol compound is bound at either terminus to a molecule of the same type of biologically-active compound, to produce a dimer of the molecule.
In some embodiments, E forms a bond to a biologically-active compound other than B, creating a heterodimer of biologically-active compounds or precursors thereof.
In other embodiments, E forms an additional bond to the biologically-active compound, B, such that both E and R are bound through different functional groups of the same molecule of the biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
When E is capable of forming a bond to a biologically-active molecule or precursor thereof, E can be the same as or different from R and is chosen from carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinimidyl, azole, maleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, and gIyoxal moieties.
When E can form a bond with a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, in some embodiments, E can be Formula HI or Formula IV:
Formula III
R"¨HC¨(CH2). Q¨X¨CW2CW2-Formula IV
1r-11C¨ (CH2)in ______________________ X CW2CW2--where each Q, X, Y, Z, m, and n are, independently, as defined above, each W
is, independently, hydrogen or a C1 to Cry alkyl, R" is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula III and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, and R" is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula IV
and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
R" and R" are, independently chosen from carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, aerylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinirnidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinimidyl, azole, maleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, and glyoxal moieties.
When bound at both ends to a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, these bifunctional molecules can be represented according to Formula XX or Formula X.XI:
Formula )0C:
add T2- (yri-i (CI-12), R
B'-R-11 CH- (CH2)õ- (Y),7" Q"-X- CW2CW2(0-CH2CH2),-X- T
Formula XXI:
(pd Z B
õr7(CHA
)Y-R":2- CH- (CH2L-X- CW2CW2-= (0-CH2C1-12)a-X--- Ti where each X and Y, T1 and T2, R' and Z, L,. Q, m, n, a, and n are as described above, and each W is, independently, hydrogen or a C1 to C7 alkyl. R* and R** are, independently, linking moieties formed from the reaction of R and R" with a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, and B and B' are each a biologically-active compound, or precursor thereof, after conjugation with R and R", respectively.
In some embodiments, B and B' are the same type of biologically-active compound. In other embodiments, B and B' are different biologically-active compounds. In still other embodiments, B and B' are the same biologically active molecule. In additional embodiments, R* and R** are the same. In other embodiments, R* and R** are different For example, in some embodiments, E can form a bond to another molecule of the biologically-active compound (I3 = B') so that the activated PGC is bound at either terminus to a molecule of the same type of biologically-active compound, to produce a dimer of the molecule.
In some embodiments, E forms a bond to a biologically-active compound other than B (B
is not B'), creating a heterodimer of biologically-active compounds or precursors thereof.
In other embodiments, E forms an additional bond to the biologically-active compound, B, such that both E (through R" or R'") and R are bound through different functional groups of the same molecule of the biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
In some embodiments, R* or R** is methylene group and B or B' is a biologically-active molecule containing an amino group, where the methylene group forms a bond with the amino group on B. For example, the amine can be the amino terminus of a peptide, an amine of an amino acid side chain of a peptide, or an amine of a glycosylation substituent of a glycosylated peptide. In some embodiments, the peptide is an interferon, such as interferon-beta, e.g., interferon-beta-la. In some embodiments, this type of bond is formed by a reductive alkYlation reaction.
Where theTi and Ti substituents of Formula XV are straight-chain alkyl groups, X and Y are oxygen, and d is zero, the conjugates are represented by Formula XIX:
Formula XDC:
______________________________ (CH2)u __ 0 (CH2)n¨C1H¨R*

0---(CH2)u where each u is independently zero or an integer from one to five and all other variables are as defined above. In particular embodiments, Z is hydrogen or methyl.

Particular classes of compounds falling within Formula XV can be represented by Formulae XVII and XVIII formed from the reaction of Formulae VII and VITT, respectively, with a biologically-active compound, or precursor thereof:
Formula XVII:

Formula XVIII:
I (CH2)n¨R*¨B

where n is zero or an integer from one to five, P is a polyalkylene glycol polymer, as described above, Z is hydrogen, a shaight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated Ci to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, R* is a linking moiety as described above, B is a biologically-active molecule. These compounds can be bifunctional or monofunctional, depending on the identity of E, as described above.
In some embodiments, R* is a methylene group and B is a biologically-active molecule containing an amino group, where the methylene group forms a bond with the amino group on B. For example, the amine scan be the amino tenninus of a peptide, an amine of an amino acid side chain of a peptide, or an amine of a glycosylation substitnent of a glycosylated peptide. In some embodiments, the peptide is an interferon, such as interferon-beta, e.g., interferon-beta-la. In some embodiments, this type of bond is formed by a reductive alkylation reaction.
The conjugates of the invention can also be formed from reaction of compounds according to Formula X with a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, to form conjugates according to Formula XXII:
Formula )OCII:
P ¨X¨ (C112)n¨ CH¨R*¨B

where B is a biologically-active molecule, as described above and n is zero or an integer from one to five.
X is 0, S, CO, CO2, cos, SO, SO2, CONR', SO2NR', or NR', when X is NR', R' is hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to Cs saturated Or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a CI to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group. If present, the substituents can be halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thiofomiate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phospbinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, or alkylthio.
Z is a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to Cs saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group.
The substituents can be halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, or allcylthio.
R* is a linking moiety formed from the reaction of R. with a corresponding functional group on the biologically-active compound, B, as described above. For example, R* is formed from the reaction of a moiety such as a carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyI, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinimidyl, azole, maleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, or glyoxal functionality with a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
In some embodiments, Z is methyl and n is one.
P is a polyalkylene glycol polymer as defined above, and can be represented by Formula II:
Formula II:

E-(0-CH2CH2)e, where E is hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain C1 to C20 alkyl group (e.g., methyl), a detectable label, or a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula XXII and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof. As above, a is an integer from 4 to 10,000.
Where E is a detectable label, the label can be, for example, a radioactive isotope, a fluorescent moiety, a phosphorescent moiety, a chemiluminescent moiety, or a quantum dot.
When E is capable of forming a bond to a biologically-active molecule or precursor thereof, a bifunctional molecule results. E can form a bond to another molecule of the biologically-active compound (B) so that the activated polyalkylene glycol compound is bound at either terminus to a molecule of the same type of biologically-active compound, to produce a dimer of the molecule.
In some embodiments, E forms a bond to a biologically-active compound other than B, creating a heterodimer of biologically-active compounds or precursors thereof.
In other embodiments, E forms an additional bond to the biologically-active compound, B, such that both E and R are bound through different functional groups of the same molecule of the biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
When E is capable of forming a bond to a biologically-active molecule or precursor thereof, E can be the same as or different from R and is chosen from carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubsfituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinimidyl, azole, maIeimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, and glyoxal moieties.
In some embodiments, E can have the structure according to Formula El or Formula IV:
Formula 111 R"-----BC¨ (CH2) (')m Q ¨X¨ CW2CW2-Formula IV
le¨HC¨(CH2 where each Q, X, Y, Z, m, and n are, independently, as defined above, each W
is, independently, hydrogen or a C1 to C7 alkyl, R" is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula III and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, and is a moiety suitable for forming a bond between the compound of Formula IV
and a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
R" and R" are, independently chosen from carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, aerylate, rnethacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinimidyl, azole, rnaleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyI, and glyoxal moieties, and can be the same or different from R.
When bound at both ends to a biologically-active compound or precursor thereof, these bifunctional molecules can be represented according to Formula XXIV or Fommla XXV:
Formula )0CIV:
R*-' B'¨R¨CH¨(CHA¨Mm¨Q¨X¨CW2CW2---(0-CH2C1-12)õ¨X--Formula XXV:
/L* 8 B'-11.4=-9-1¨(CH2)-,---X¨CW2CW7--(0-CH2CH2),¨X¨(CF12),1 R
where each X and Y is independently 0, S, CO, 002, cos, SO, SO2, CONR', SO2NR', or NR', and each R' and Z is, independently, hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to Cm alkyl or heteroalkyl group.
Q is a C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl (including fused bicyclic and bridged bicyclic ring structures), a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group. If present, the substituents can be halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, or alkylthio.
Each W is, independently, hydrogen or a C1 to C7 alkyl, m is zero or one, a is an integer from 4 to 10,000, and each n is independently 0 or an integer from 1 to 5.
R* and R** are independently linking moieties as described above, B and B' are independently biologically-active molecules and can be the same or different.
E (through R" or R") can form a bond to another molecule of the biologically-active compound (B) so that the activated polyalkylene glycol compound is bound at either terminus to a molecule of the same type of biologically-active compound, to produce a dimer of the molecule.
In some embodiments, E (through R" or R") forrns a bond to a biologically-active compound other than B, creating a heterodimer of biologically-active compounds or precursors thereof.
In other embodiments, E (through R" or R') forms an additional bond to the biologically-active compound, B, such that both E and R are bound through different functional groups of the same molecule of the biologically-active compound or precursor thereof.
R" and R' can be the same as or different from R, and are chosen from carboxylic acid, ester, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, acetal, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, carbonate, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted amine, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, succinimidyl, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, dithiopyridine, vinyIpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, hydroxysuccinimidyl, azole, maleimide, sulfone, allyl, vinylsulfone, tresyl, sulfo-N-succinimidyl, dione, mesyl, tosyl, and glyoxal moieties.
In some embodiments, R* or R** is a methylene group and B or B' is a biologically-active molecule containing an amino group, where the methylene group forms a bond with the amino group on B. For example, the amine can be the amino terminus of a peptide, an amine of an amino acid side chain of a peptide, or an amine of a glycosylation substituent of a - .
glycosylated peptide. In some embodiments, the peptide is an interferon, such as interferon-beta, e.g., interferon-beta-la. In some embodiments, this type of bond is formed by a reductive alkylation reaction.
The conjugates of the invention can be prepared by coupling a biologically-active compound to a polyalkylene glycol compound as described in the Examples. In some embodiments, the coupling is achieved via a reductive allcylation reaction.
Biologically-active compounds of interest include any substance intended for diagnosis, cure mitigation, treatment, or prevention of disease in humans or other animals, or to otherwise enhance physical or mental well-being of humans or animals. Examples of biologically-active molecules include, but are not limited to, peptides, peptide analogs, proteins, enzymes, small molecules, dyes, lipids, nucleosides, oligonucleotides, analogs of oligonucleotides, sugars, oligosaccharides, cells, viruses, Iiposomes, microparticles, surfaces and micelles. This class of compounds also include precursors of these types of molecules. Classes of biologically-active agents that are suitable for use with the invention include, but are not limited to, cytoldiaes, chemokines, lymphokines, soluble receptors, antibodies, antibiotics, fungicides, anti-viral agents, anti-inflammatory agents, anti-tumor agents, cardiovascular agents, anti-anxiety agents, hormones, growth factors, steroidal agents, and the like.
The biologically-active compound can be a peptide, such as an interferon, including interferon-beta (e.g., interferon-beta-la) or interferon-alpha.
Because the polymeric modification with a PGC of the invention reduces antigenic responses, a foreign peptide need not be completely autologous in order to be used as a therapeutic. For example, a peptide, such as interferon, used to prepare polymer conjugates may be prepared from a mammalian extract, such as human, ruminant, or bovine interferon, or can be synthetically or recombinantly produced.
For example, in one aspect, the invention is directed to compounds and methods for treating conditions that are susceptible of treatment with interferon alpha or beta.
Administration of a polyalkylene glycol conjugated interferon beta (hereinafter "PGC
IFN-beta", "PGC IFN-P", e.g., PEG IFN-beta", "PEG ]FN-p" "PEGylated IFN-beta", or "PEGylated LEN-(3") provides improved therapeutic benefits, while substantially reducing or eliminating entirely the undesirable side effects normally associated with conventionally practiced interferon alpha or beta treatment regimes.
The PGC ]FN-beta can be prepared by attaching a polyalkylene polymer to the terminal amino group of the IFN beta molecule. A single activated polyalkylene glycol molecule can be conjugated to the N-terminus of rFN beta via a reductive allcylation reaction.
_ The PGC IFN-beta conjugate can be formulated, for example, as a liquid or a lyophilized powder for injection. The objective of conjugation of IFN beta with a PGC is to improve the delivery of the protein by significantly prolonging its plasma half-life, and thereby provide protracted activity of IFN beta.
The term "interferon" or IFN" as used herein means the family of highly homologous species-specific proteins that inhibit viral replication and cellular proliferation and modulate immune response. Human interferons are grouped into two classes; Type 1, including a- and 13-interferon, and Type II, which is represented by 7-interferon only.
Recombinant forms of each group have been developed and are commercially available. Subtypes in each group are based on antigenic/structural characteristics.
The terms "beta interferon", "beta-interferon", "beta IFN", "beta-IFN", "i3 interferon", "13-interferon", "13 IFN", "P-IFN", "interferon beta", "interferon-beta", "interferon "interferon-13", "IFN beta", "IFN-beta", "IFN "IFN-13", and "human fibroblast interferon"
are used interchangeably herein to describe members of the group of interferon beta's which have distinct amino acid sequences as have been identified by isolating and sequencing DNA
encoding the peptides.
Additionally, the terms "beta interferon la", "beta interferon-la" "beta-interferon la", "beta-interferon-1a", "beta IFN 1a", "beta IFN-1a", "beta-IFN la", "beta-TN-la", "13 interferon la", "J3 interferon-1a", "P-interferon la", "P-interferon-la", "f3 IFN la", "P
IFN-la", "13-IFN
la", "P-IFN-la", "interferon beta la", "interferon beta-la", "interferon-beta la", "interferon-beta-1a", "interferon f3 la", "interferon 0-1a", "interferon-13 1a", "interferon-P-1a", "IFN beta la", "IFN beta-la", "IFN-beta la", "IFN-beta-la", "TEN P la", "UN J3-la", "IFN'-J3 la", ITN-J3-la" are used interchangeably herein to describe recombinantly- or synthetically-produced interferon beta that has the naturally-occurring (wild type) amino acid sequences.
The advent of recombinant DNA technology applied to interferon production has permitted several human interferons to be successfiffly synthesized, thereby enabling the large-scale fermentation, production, isolation, and purification of various interferons to homogeneity. Recombinantly produced interferon retains some- or most of- its in vitro and in vivo antiviral and immunomodulatory activities. It is also understood that recombinant techniques could also include a glycosylation site for addition of a carbohydrate moiety on the recombinantly-derived polypeptide.
The construction of recombinant DNA plasmids containing sequences encoding at least part of human fibroblast interferon and the expression of a polypeptide having immtmOlogical or biological activity of human fibroblast interferon is also contemplated_ The construction of (.-hybrid beta-interferon genes containing combinations of different subtype sequences can be accomplished by techniques known to those of skill in the art.
Typical suitable recombinant beta-interferons which may be used in the practice of the invention include but are not limited to interferon beta-la such as AVONDe available from Biogen, Inc., Cambridge, MA, and interferon-beta-lb such as BETASERON
available from Berlex, Richmond, CA.
There are many mechanisms by which IFN-induced gene products provide protective effects against viral infection. Such inhibitory viral effects occur at different stages of the viral life cycle. See. 'U.S. Patent No. 6,030,785. For example, IFN can inhibit uncoating of viral particles, penetration, and/or fusion caused by viruses.
Conditions that can be treated in accordance with the present invention are generally those that are susceptible to treatment with interferon. For example, susceptible conditions include those, which would respond positively or favorably (as these terms are known in the medical arts) to interferon beta-based therapy. For purposes of the invention, conditions that can be treated with interferon beta therapy described herein include those conditions in which treatment with an interferon beta shows some efficacy, but in which the negative side effects of IFN-I3 treatment outweigh the benefits. Treatment according to the methods of tire invention results in substantially reduced or eliminated side effects as compared to conventional interferon beta treatment. In addition, conditions traditionally thought to be refractory to IFN-0 treatment, or those for which it is impractical to treat with a manageable dosage of IFN-P, can be treated in accordance with the methods of the present invention.
The PGC lFN-13 compounds of the invention can be used alone or in combination with one or more agents useful for treatment for a particular condition. At least one pilot study of recombinant interferon beta-la for the treatment of chronic hepatitis C has been conducted.
See generally Habersetzer et al., Liver 30:437-441 (2000). For example, the compounds can be administered in combination with known antiviral agents for treatment of a viral infection. See Kakumu et al., Gastroenterology 105:507-12 (1993) and Pepinslcy, et al., J.
Phaiiiiacology and Experimental Therapeutics, 297:1059-1066 (2001), As used herein, the term "antivirals" may include, for example, small molecules, peptides, sugars, proteins, virus-derived molecules, protease inhibitors, nucleotide analogs and/or nucleoside analogs. A "small molecule" as the term is used herein refers to an organic molecule of less than about 2500 amu (atomic mass units), preferably less than about 1000 amu. Examples of suitable antiviral compounds include, but are not limited to, ribavirin, levovirin, 1vtB6866, zidovudine 3TC, FTC, acyclovir, gancyclovir, viramide, VX-497, VX-950, and ISIS-14803.
Exemplary conditions which can be treated with interferon include, but are not limited to, cell proliferation disorders, in particular multiple sclerosis, cancer (e.g., hairy cell leukemia, Kaposi's sarcoma, chronic myelogenous leukemia, multiple myeloma, basal cell carcinoma and malignant melanoma, ovarian cancer, cutaneous T cell lymphoma), and viral infections.
Without limitation, treatment with interferon may be used to treat conditions which would benefit from inhibiting the replication of interferon-sensitive viruses. For example, interferon can be used alone or in combination with AZT in the treatment of human immunodeficiency virus (H1V)/AIDS or in combination with ribavirin in the treatment of HCV.
Viral infections which may be treated in accordance with the invention include, but are not limited to, hepatitis A, hepatitis B, hepatitis C, other non-A/non-B hepatitis, herpes virus, Epstein-Barr virus (EBV), cytomegalovirus (CMV), herpes simplex, human herpes virus type 6 (HHY-6), papilloma, poxvirus, picomavirus, adenovirus, rhinovirus, human T lymphotropic virus-type 1 and 2 (HTLV-1/-2), human rotavirus, rabies, retroviruses including HIV, encephalitis, and respiratory viral infections. The methods of the invention can also be used to modify various immune responses.
A correlation between HCV genotype and response to interferon therapy has been observed. See U.S. Patent No. 6,030,785; Enomoto et al., N. Engl. J.
Med.334:77-81 (1996);
Enomoto et al., J. Clin. Invest. 96:224-30 (1995). The response rate in patients infected with HCV-I b is less than 40%. See U.S. Patent No. 6,030,785. Similar low response rates have also been observed in patients infected with HCV-la. See id.; Hoofnagel et al., Intervirology 37:87-100 (1994). However, the response rate in patients infected with HCV-2 is nearly 80%.
See U.S. Patent No. 6,030,785; Fried et al., Semin. Liver Dis. 15:82-91 (1995). In fact, an amino acid sequence of a discrete region of the NS5A protein of HCV genotype lb was found to correlate with sensitivity to interferon. See U.S. Patent No. 6,030,785.
See also Enomoto et al. 1996; Enomoto et al.1995. This region has been identified as the interferon sensitivity deteunining region (ISDR). See id.
The PGC EFN-beta conjugate is administered in a pharmacologically-effective amount to treat any of the conditions described above, and is based on the MN beta activity of the polymeric conjugate. The term "pharmacologically-effective amount" means the amount of a drug or pharmaceutical agent that will elicit the biological or medical response of a tissue, system, animal or human that is being sought by a researcher or clinician. It is an amount that _ .
is sufficient to significantly affect a positive clinical response while maintaining diminished levels of side effects. The amount of PGC IFN-beta which may be administered to a subject in need thereof is in the range of 0.01-100 pg/kg, or more preferably 0.01-10 p,g/kg, administered in single or divided doses.
Administration of the described dosages may be every other day, but preferably occurs once a week or once every other week. Doses are administered over at least a 24 week period by injection.
Administration of the dose can be oral, topical, intravenous, subcutaneous, intramuscular, or any other acceptable systemic method. Based on the judgment of the attending clinician, the amount of drug administered and the treatment regimen used will, of course, be dependent on the age, sex and medical history of the patient being treated, the neutrophil count (e.g., the severity of the neutropenia), the severity of the specific disease condition and the tolerance of the patient to the treatment as evidenced by local toxicity and by systemic side-effects.
In practice, the conjugates of the invention are administered in amounts which will be sufficient to inhibit or prevent undesired medical conditions or disease in a subject, such as a mammal, and are used in the form most suitable for such purposes. The compositions are preferably suitable for internal use and include an effective amount of a pharmacologically-active compound of the invention, alone or in combination with other active agents, with one or more pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers. The compounds are especially useful in that they have very low, if any, toxicity.
The conjugates herein described can form the active ingredient of a pharmaceutical composition, and are typically administered in a mixture with suitable pharmaceutical diluents, excipients or carriers (collectively referred to herein as "carrier"
materials) suitably selected with respect to the intended form of administration, that is, oral tablets, capsules, elixirs, syrups and the like. The compositions typically will include an effective amount of active compound or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof, and in addition, and may also include any carrier materials as are customarily used in the pharmaceutical sciences.
Depending on the intended mode of administration, the compositions may be in solid, semi-solid or liquid dosage form, such as, for example, injectables, tablets, suppositories, pills, time-release capsules, powders, liquids, suspensions, or the like, preferably in unit dosages.
Conventional pharmaceutical compositions comprising a pharmacologically-effective amount of a conjugate, e.g., PGC IFN-beta, together with pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers, adjuvants, diluents, preservatives and/or solubilizers may be used in the practice of the invention. Pharmaceutical compositions of interferon include diluents of various buffers (e.g., (.
arginine, Tris-HC1, acetate, phosphate) having a range of pH and ionic strength, carriers (e.g., human serum albumin), solubilizers (e.g., tween, polysorbate), and preservatives (e.g., benzyl alcohol). See, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 4,496,537.
Administration of the active compounds described herein can be via any of the accepted modes of administration for therapeutic agents. These methods include systemic or local administration such as oral, nasal, parenteral, transdermal, subcutaneous, or topical administration modes.
For instance, for oral administration in the form of a tablet or capsule (e.g., a gelatin capsule), the active drug component can be combined with an oral, non-toxic pharmaceutically-acceptable inert carrier such as ethanol, glycerol, water, and the like.
Moreover, when desired or necessary, suitable binders, lubricants, disintegrating agents, and coloring agents can also be incorporated into the mixture. Suitable binders include starch, magnesium aluminum silicate, starch paste, gelatin, methylcellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose ancVor polyvirtylpyrrolidone, sugars, corn sweeteners, natural and synthetic gums such as acacia, tragacanth or sodium alginate, polyethylene glycol, waxes and the like. Lubricants used in these dosage forms include sodium oleate, sodium stearate, magnesium stearate, sodium benzoate, sodium acetate, sodium chloride, silica, talcum, stearic acid, its magnesium or calcium salt, and/or polyethylene glycol and the like.
Disintegrators include, without limitation, starch, methyl cellulose, agar, bentonite, xanthan gum starches, agar, alginic acid or its sodium salt, or effervescent mixtures, and the like.
Diluents, include, e.g., lactose, dextrose, sucrose, mannitol, sorbitol, cellulose and/or glycine.
The conjugates of the invention can also be administered in such oral dosage forms as tirned-release and sustained-release tablets or capsules, pills, powders, granules, elixers, tinctures, suspensions, syrups, and emulsions.
Liquid, particularly injectable compositions can, for example, be prepared by dissolving, dispersing, etc. The active compound is dissolved in or mixed with a pharmaceutically-pure solvent such as, for example, water, saline, aqueous dextrose, glycerol, ethanol, and the like, to thereby form the injectable solution or suspension.
Additionally, solid forms suitable for dissolving in liquid prior to injection can be formulated.
Injectable compositions are preferably aqueous isotonic solutions or suspensions. The compositions may be sterilized andJor contain adjuvants, such as preserving, stabilizing, wetting or emulsifying agents, solution promoters, salts for regulating the osrnotic pressure and/or buffers. In addition, they may also contain other therapeutically-valuable substances.

The conjugates of the present invention can be administered in intravenous (e.g., bolus or infusion), intraperitoneal, subcutaneous or intramuscular form, all using forms well known to those of ordinary skill in the pharmaceutical arts. Injectables can be prepared in conventional forms, either as liquid solutions or suspensions.
Parental injectable administration is generally used for subcutaneous, intramuscular or intravenous injections and infusions. For example, when a subcutaneous injection is used to deliver 0.01-100 ug/kg, or more preferably 0.01-10 pig/kg of PEGylated IFN-beta over one week, two injections of 0.005-50 pig/kg, or more preferably 0.005-5 p.g/kg, respectively, may =
be administered at 0 and 72 hours. Additionally, one approach for parenteral administration employs the implantation of a slow-release or sustained-released system, which assures that a constant level of dosage is maintained, according to U.S. Pat. No. 3,710,795, Furthermore, preferred conjugates for the present invention can be administered in intranasal form via topical use of suitable intranasal vehicles, or via transdermal routes, using those forms of transdermal skin patches well known to those of ordinary skill in that art. To be administered in the form of a transdermal delivery system, the dosage administration will, of course, be continuous rather than intermittent throughout the dosage regimen.
Other preferred topical preparations include creams, ointments, lotions, aerosols, sprays and gels, wherein the amount administered would be 10-100 times the dose typically given by parenteral administration.
For solid compositions, excipients include pharmaceutical grades of mannitol, lactose, starch, magnesium stearate, sodium saccharin, talcum, cellulose, glucose, sucrose, magnesium carbonate, and the like may be used. The active compound defined above, may be also formulated as suppositories using for example, polyalkylene glycols, for example, propylene glycol, as the carrier. In some embodiments, suppositories are advantageously prepared from fatty emulsions or suspensions.
The conjugates of the present invention can also be administered in the form of liposome delivery systems, such as small unilamellar vesicles, large unilamellar vesicles and multilamellar vesicles. Liposomes can be formed from a variety of phospholipids, containing cholesterol, stearylamine, or phosphatidylcholines. In some embodiments, a film of lipid components is hydrated with an aqueous solution of drug to a form lipid layer encapsulating the drug, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,262,564.
Conjugates of the present invention may also be delivered by the use of iramunoglobulin fusions as individual carriers to which the compound molecules are coupled.

The compounds of the present invention may also be coupled with soluble polymers as targetable drug carriers. Such polymers can include polyvinylpyrrolidone, pyran copolymer, polyhydroxypropyl-methacrylamide-phenol, polyhydroxyethylaspanarnidephenol, or polyethyleneoxidepolylysine substituted with palmitoyl residues. The conjugates can also be coupled to proteins, such as, for example, receptor proteins and albumin.
Furthermore, the compounds of the present invention may be coupled to a class of biodegradable polymers useful in achieving controlled release of a drug, for example, polylacfic acid, polyepsilon caprolactone, polyhydroxy butyric acid, polyorthoesters, polyacetals, polydihydropyrans, polycyanoacrylates and cross-linked or amphipathic block copolymers of hydrogels.
If desired, the pharmaceutical composition to be administered may also contain minor amounts of non-toxic auxiliary substances such as wetting or emulsifying agents, pH buffering agents, and other substances such as for example, sodium acetate, triethanolamine oleate, etc.
The dosage regimen utilizing the conjugates is selected in accordance with a variety of factors including type, species, age, weight, sex and medical condition of the patient; the severity of the condition to be treated; the route of administration; the renal and hepatic function of the patient; and the particular compound or salt thereof employed.
The activity of the compounds of the invention and sensitivity of the patient to side effects are also considered.
An ordinarily skilled physician or veterinarian can readily determine and prescribe the effective amount of the drug required to prevent, counter or arrest the progress of the condition.
Oral dosages of the present invention, when used for the indicated effects, will range between about 0.01-100 ii.g/kg/day orally, or more preferably 0.01-101.1g/1(g/day orally. The compositions are preferably provided in the form of scored tablets containing 0.5-5000 ìg, or more preferably 0.5-500 ptg of active ingredient.
For any route of administration, divided or single doses may be used. For example, compounds of the present invention may be administered daily or weekly, in a single dose, or the total dosage may be administered in divided doses of two, three or four.
Any of the above pharmaceutical compositions may contain 0.1-99%, 1-70%, or, preferably, 1-50% of the active compounds of the invention as active ingredients.
As described above, the course of the disease and its response to drug treatments may be followed by clinical examination and laboratory findings. The effectiveness of the therapy of the invention is determined by the extent to which the previously described signs and symptoms of a condition, e.g., chronic hepatitis, are alleviated and the extent to which the normal side effects of interferon (i.e., flu-like symptoms such as fever, headache, chills, ("-myalgia, fatigue, etc. and central nervous system related symptoms such as depression, paresthesia, impaired concentration, etc.) are eliminated or substantially reduced.
In some embodiments, a polyalkylated compound of the invention (e.g., a PEGylated interferon) is administered in conjunction with one or more pharmaceutical agents useful for treatment for a particular condition. For example, a polyalkylated protein can be administered in combination with a known antiviral agent or agent for treatment of a viral infection. Such antiviral compounds include, for example, ribavirin, levovirin, MB6866, and zidovudine 3TC, FTC, acyclovir, gancyclovir, viramide, VX-497, VX-950, and ISIS-14803.
The conjugate and antiviral can be simultaneously administered (e.g., the agents are administered to a patient together); sequentially administered (e.g., the agents are administered to the patient one after the other); or alternatively administered (e.g., the agents are administered in a repeating series, such as agent A then agent B, then agent A, etc).
In the practice of the invention, the preferred PGC IFN-beta (e.g., PEG UN-beta) may be administered to patients infected with the hepatitis C virus. Use of PEG
LFN-beta-la is preferred.
Patients are selected for treatment from anti-HCV antibody-positive patients with biopsy-documented chronic active hepatitis.
In order to follow the course of HCV replication in subjects in response to drug treatment, HCV RNA may be measured in serum satin:des by, for example, a nested polymerase chain reaction assay that uses two sets of primers derived from the NS3 and NS4 non-structural gene regions of the HCV genome. See Farci et al., 1991, New Eng. J. Med.
325:98-104. Ulrich et al., 1990. J. Chia. Invest., 86:1609-1614.
Antiviral activity may be measured by changes in HCV-RNA titer. HCV RNA data may be analyzed by comparing titers at the end of treatment with a pre-treatment baseline measurement. Reduction in HCV RNA by week 4 provides evidence of antiviral activity of a compound. See Kleter et al., 1993, Antimicrob. Agents Chemother. 37(3):595-97;
Orito et al., 1995, J. Medical Virology, 46:109-115. Changes of at least two orders of magnitude (>2 log) is interpreted as evidence of antiviral activity.
A person suffering from chronic hepatitis C infection may exhibit one or more of the following signs or symptoms: (a) elevated serum alanine aminotransferase (ALT), (b) positive test for anti-HCV antibodies, (c) presence of HCV as demonstrated by a positive test for HCV-RNA, (d) clinical stigmata of chronic liver disease, (e) hepatocellular damage. Such criteria may not only be used to diagnose hepatitis C, but can be used to evaluate a patient's response to drug treatrnent.

(, Elevated alanine aminotransferase (ALT) and aspartate aminotransferase (AST) are known to occur in uncontrolled hepatitis C, and a complete response to treatment is generally defined as the nonnalization of these serum enzymes, particularly ALT. See Davis et al., 1989, New Eng. J. Med. 321:1501-1506. ALT is an enzyme released when liver cells are destroyed and is symptomatic of HCV infection. Interferon causes synthesis of the enzyme 2',5'-oligoadenylate synthetase (2'5'0AS), which in turn, results in the degradation of the viral mRNA. See Houglum, 1983, Clinical Pharmacology 2:20-28. Increases in serum levels of the 2'510AS coincide with decrease in ALT levels.
Histological examination of liver biopsy samples may be used as a second criteria for evaluation. See, e.g., Knodell et al., 1981, Hepatology 1:431-435, whose Histological Activity Index (portal inflammation, piecemeal or bridging necrosis, lobular injury, and fibrosis) provides a scoring method for disease activity.
Safety and tolerability or treatment may be determined by clinical evaluations and measure of white blood cell and neutrophil counts. This may be assessed through periodic monitoring of hematological parameters e.g., white blood cell, neutrophil, platelet, and red blood cell counts).
Various other extended- or sustained-release formulations can be prepared using conventional methods well known in the art.
Many modifications and variations of this invention can be made without departing from its spirit and scope, as will be apparent to those skilled in the art The specific embodiments described herein are offered by way of example only, and the invention is to be limited only by the terms of the appended claims, along with the full scope of equivalents to which such claims are entitled.
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1: Synthesis of activated polyalkylene glycols A) Alleviation of alcohols Activated polyalkylene glycols are synthesized by alkylating a polyalkylene glycol having a free terminal hydroxyl functionality. A generic reaction is outlined in Scheme I:

=
Scheme I
(C112), P
P-OH + Br 07 A z B z The polyallcylene glycol (P-OH) is reacted with the alkyl halide (A) to form the ether (B). Compound B is then hydroxylated to form the alcohol (C), which is oxidized to the aldehyde (D). In these compounds, n is an integer from zero to five and Z can be a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group.
Z can also be a C3 to C7 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl (the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl) or heteroalkaryl group. For substituted compounds, the substituents can be halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, forrnyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, irnino, silyl, ether, or alkylthio. Typically, P-OH is polyethylene glycol (PEG) or rnonomethoxy polyethylene glycol (mPEG) having a molecular weight of 5,000 to 40,000 Daltons (Da).
For example, the synthesis of mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde is outlined in Scheme II.

Scheme II:
then CH3 NaH 50 eq. CH3 ,OH
mPEG"
THF Cat. KI

1. BH3TTHF DMP
2. H202, NaOH mPEG CH2Cl2 mPEG

mPEG-OH with a molecular weight of 20, 000 Da (mPEG-OH 20 kDa; 2.0 g, 0.1 mmol, Sunbio) was treated with Nall (12 mg, 0.5 mmol) in THF (35 mL). Fifty equivalents of 3-bromo-2-methylpropene (3.34 g, 5 mmol) and a catalytic amount of KI were then added to the mixture. The resulting mixture was heated to reflux for 16 h. Water (1 mL) was then added and the solvent was removed under vacuum. To the residue was added CH2C12 (25 mL) and the organic layer was separated, dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, and the volume was reduced to approximately 2 mL. This CH2C12 solution was added to ether (150 mT
) drop-wise.
The resulting white precipitate was collected, yielding 1.9 g of compound 1.
'TIMOR. (CDC13, 400 MHz) showed 8 4.98 (s, 1H), 4.91 (s, 1H), 1.74 (s, 3H).
To compound 1 (1.9 g, 0.1 mmol) in THF (20 mL) and CH2C12 (2 mL) at 0 C, was added BH3 in THF (1.0 M, 3.5 mL). The mixture was stirred in an ice bath for 1 h. To this mixture, NaOH was added slowly (2.0 M, 2.5 mL), followed by 30% 11202 (0.8 mL). The reaction was warmed to room temperature and stirred for 16 h. The above work-up procedure was followed (CH2Cl2, precipitated from ether) to yield 1.8 g of 2 as a white solid. IHNMR
(CDC13, 400 MHz) showed 5 1.80 (m, IH), 0.84 (d, 3I1).
Compound 2 (250 mg) was dissolved in CH2C12 (2.5 mL) and Dess-Martin periodinate (DMI); 15 mg) was added with stiffing for 30 min at room temperature. To the mixture was added saturated NaHCO3 and Na2S203 (2 mL) and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h. The above work-up procedure was followed to give 3 (mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde, 120 mg) as a white solid. 111NMR (CDC13, 400 MHz) showed 5 9.75 (s, 11i), 2.69 (m, 1H), 1.16 (d, 3H).
A similar procedure is followed for aromatic alcohols, as shown in Scheme III:

Scheme 4. Br _______________________________ T2 OH
HO¨Ti = A
HO¨T/
(1.)d ________________________________ T2-0 _____ (MAI
Br¨Ti (L)a ________________________________ T2-0 _____ (CH2),, L
P¨O¨TI
(L)d ________________________________ T2 ¨O (CH2), __ OH I
________________________________ T2 ¨O (CH), __ In general, the aromatic alcohol (E) is reacted with the alkyl halide (A) to form the mono ether (F). The remaining alcohol group of compound F is then converted to the halide (e.g., bromide) in Compound G, which is reacted with the polyallcylene glycol (P-OH) to give the ether (H). This compound is then converted to the aldehyde (J) through a hydroboration to the primary alcohol (I) followed by oxidation. In these compounds, n is an integer from zero to five, d is zero or an integer from one to four, and Z can be a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated CI to C20 alkyl or heteroallcyl group. Z can also be a C3 to C7 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalky1, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl (the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl) or heteroalicaryl group. For substituted compounds, the substituents can be (,.
halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, forrnyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfarnoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocycIy1, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, or allcylthio.
Additionally, T1 and T2 are, independently, absent, or a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C/ to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, and can be ortho, meta, or para to each other. Each L (when present) is, independently, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated CI to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to C7 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group. The substituents can be halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, Unit , silyl, ether, or allcylthio.
Usually, P-OH is polyethylene glycol (PEG) or monornethoxy polyethylene glycol (mPEG) having a molecular weight of 5, 000 to 40, 000 Da.
For example, the synthesis of mPEG-0-p-methylphenyl-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde (8) is shown in Scheme IV;

Scheme IV:
CH3 cu, osi OH
NaOH

1. MsCI, TEA erbi HO 401:1 ___________ )11,= Br tip.
CH3 2. LiBr thenNaiI
lah 50 eq. 5_ o OH
________________________________________ 71/.mPEG
mPEG
THF Cat. K:1 BH3/THF eih OH * 0 s 0 DMP
õ...0 lej 2.11202, NaOH ThPEG CH2C12 niPEG

To a solution of 4-hydroxybenzylalcohol (2.4 g, 20 mmol) in THF (50 mL) and water (2.5 mL) was first added sodium hydroxide (1.5 g, 37.5 mmol) and then 3-bromo-methylpropene (4.1 g, 30 mmol). This reaction mixture was heated to reflux for 16 h. To the mixture was added 10% citric acid (2.5 mL) and the solvent was removed under vacuum. The residue was extracted with ethyl acetate (3 x 15 mL) and the combined organic layers were washed with saturated NaC1 (10 mL), dried and concentrated to give compound 4.
(3.3 g, 93 %). 1HNMR (CDC13, 400 MHz) showed & 7.29 (m, 2H), 6.92 (m, 2H), 5.14 (s, 111), 5.01 (s, 1H), 4.56 (s, 2H), 4.46 (s, 211), 1.85 (s, 3H).
Mesyl chloride (MsCl; 2.5 g, 15.7 mmol) and triethyl amine (_LEA; 2.8 mL, 20 mmol) were added to a solution of compound 4 (2.0 g, 11.2 mrnol) in CH2C12 (25 taL) at 0 C and the reaction was placed in the refrigerator for 16 h. A usual work-up yielded a pale yellow oil (2.5 g, 87%). 1HNMR (CDC13, 400 MHz) showed 5 7.31 (m, 211), 6.94 (m, 2H), 5.16 (s, 1H), 5.01 (s, 1H), 5.03 (s, 2H), 4.59 (s, 211), 4.44 (s, 2H), 3.67 (s, 3H), 1.85 (s, 3H). This oil (2.4 g, 9.4 mmol) was dissolved in THF (20 mL) and LiBr (2.0 g, 23.0 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was heated to reflux for 1 h and was then cooled to room temperature.
Water (2.5 mL) was added to the mixture and the solvent was removed under vacuum. The residue was extracted with ethyl acetate (3 x 15 mL) and the combined organic layers were washed with saturated NaC1 (10 mL), dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, and concentrated to give the desired bromide 5 (2.3 g, 96%) as a pale yellow oil. 1FINIVER (CDC13, 400 MHz) showed 8 7.29 (m, 2H), 6.88 (m, 211), 5.11 (s, 1H), 4.98 (s, 1H), 4.53 (s, 211), 4.44 (s, 2H), 1.83 (s, 3H). -mPEG-OH 20 kDa (2.0 g, 0.1 mmol, Sunbio) was treated with NaH (12 mg, 0.5 mmol) in THF (35 mL) and compound 5 (0.55 g, 22.8 mmol) was added to the mixture with a catalytic amount of Kl. The resulting mixture was heated to reftux for 16 h.
Water (1.0 mL) was added to the mixture and the solvent was removed under vacuum. To the residue was added CH2C12 (25 mL) and the organic layer was separated, dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, and the volume was reduced to approximately 2 mL. Drop-wise addition to an ether solution (150 mL) resulted in a white precipitate which was collected to yield 6 (1.5 g) as a white powder.
IHNMR. (CDCI3, 400 MHz) showed 5 7.21 (d, 2H), 6.90 (d, 2H), 5.01 (s, 1H), 4.99 (s, 1H), 4.54 (s, 2H), 4.43 (s, 2H), 1.84 (s, 3H).
To a solution of compound 6 (1.0 g, 0.05 mmol) in THF (10 mL) and CH2C12 (2 mL) cooled to 0 C, was added BH3/THF (1.0 M, 3.5 mL) and the reaction was stirred for 1 h. A 2.0 M NaOH solution (2.5 mL) was added slowly and followed by 30% H202 (0.8 mL).
The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred for 16 h.
The above work-up procedure was followed (CH2C12, precipitated from ether) to yield 7 (350 mg) as a white solid. 1HN4R (CDC13, 400 MHz) showed 8 7.21 (d, 2H), 6.84 (d, 2H), 4.54 (s, 2H), 2.90 (m, 2 H), 1.96 (d, 3H).
Compound 7 (150 mg, 0.0075 mmol) was dissolved in CH2C12 (1.5 mL) and DMP (15 mg) was added while the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1.5 h. 1HNMR
(CDC13, 400 MHz) showed S 9.76 (s, IH), 7.21 (d, 2H), 6.78 (d, 2H), 4.44 (s, 2H), 4.14 (m, 2H), 2.85(m, 1H), 1.21 (d, 3H). To the mixture was added saturated NaHCO3 (0.5 mL) and Na2S203 (0.5 mL) and stirring continued at room temperature for 1 h. The above work-up procedure was followed (CH2C12 solution, precipitated from ether) to give 8 (92 mg) as a white solid.
Similarly, mPEG-0-m-methylpheny1-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde (9) was synthesized as outlined in Scheme V.

Scheme V:

HO OH
SI NaOH HO 41) 1. MsCI, TEA Br 110 C113 2. LiBr then 410 Nall 11 O
50 eq.
mPEG
THF Cat. K.1 l. BH3/THF mEEG OH or -0 40 MA) D

2. H202, NaOH CH2Cl2
12 2 To a solution of 3-hydroxybenzylalcohol (2.4 g, 20 mmol) in THF (50 mL) and water (2.5 mL) was first added sodium hydroxide (1.5 g, 37.5 mmol) and then 3-bromo-methylpropene (4.1 g, 30 mmol). This reaction mixture was heated to reflux for 16 h. To the mixture was added 10% citric acid (2.5 mL) and the solvent was removed under vacuum. The residue was extracted with ethyl acetate (3 x 15 mL) and the combined organic layers were washed with saturated NaC1 (10 mL), dried and concentrated to give compound 10 (3.2 g, 90 %). IFINMR (CDC13, 400 MHz) showed 8 7.26 (m, 1H), 6.94 (m, 2H), 6.86 (m, 1H), 5.11 (s, 1H), 5.01 (s, 1H), 4.61 (s, 1H), 4.44 (s, 2H), 1.82 (s, 3H).
MsC1 (2.5 g, 15.7 mmol) and YEA (2.8 mL, 20 mmol) were added to a solution of compound 10 (2.0 g, 11.2 mmol) in CH2C12 (25 mL) at 0 C and the reaction was placed in the refrigerator for 16 h. A usual work-up yielded a pale yellow oil (2.5 g, 87%).
IHNMIt (CDC13, 400 MHz) showed 8 7.31 (m, 1H), 7.05 (m, 2H), 6.91 (m, 1H), 5.16 (s, 1H), 5.04 (s, 1H), 4.59 (s, 1H), 4.46 (s, 2H), 3.71 (s, 3H), 1.84 (s, 3H). This oil (2.4 g, 9.4 mmol) was dissolved in THF (20 mL) and LiBr (2.0 g, 23.0 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was heated to reflux for 1 h and was then cooled to room temperature. To the mixture was added water (2.5 mL) and the solvent was removed under vacuum. The residue was extracted with ethyl acetate (3 x 15 mL) and the combined organic layers were washed with saturated NaC1 (10 mL), dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, and concentrated to give the desired bromide 11 (2.2 g, 92 %) as a pale yellow oil. 1HNMR (CDC13, 400 MHz) showed 8 7.29 (m, 1H), 6.98 (m, 2H), 6.85 (m, 1H), 5.14 (s, 2H), 4.98 (s, 2H), 4.50 (s, 2H), 4.44 (s, 2H), 1.82 (d, 3H). --mPEG-OH 20 kr.)a (2.0 g, 0.1 mmol, Sunbio) was treated with NaH (12 mg, 0.5 mmol) in THF (35 mL) and compound 11 (0.55 g, 22.8 mmol) was added to the mixture with a catalytic amount of KI. The resulting mixture was heated to reflux for 16 h.
Water (1.0 mL) was added to the mixture and the solvent was removed under vacuum. To the residue was added CH2C12 (25 mL) and the organic layer was separated, dried over anhydrous Na2804, and the volume was reduced to approximately 2 mL. Drop-wise addition to an ether solution (150 mL) resulted in a white precipitate which was collected to yield 12 (1.8 g) as a white powder.
IIINMR (CDCI3, 400 MHz) showed 8 7.19 (m, 1H), 6.88 (m, 2H), 6.75 (m, 11-1), 4.44 (s, 2H), 4.10 (m, 2H), 1.82 (d, 3H).
To a solution of compound 12 (1.0 g, 0.05 mmol) in THF (7.5 mL) and CH2C12 (2.5 mL) cooled to 0 C, was added BH3/THF (1.) M, 3.5 mL) and the reaction was stirred for 1 h.
A 2.0 M NaOH solution (3 mL) was added slowly, followed by 30% H202 (0.85 mL).
The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred for 16 h.
The above work-up procedure was followed (CH2C12, precipitated from ether) to yield 13 (450 mg) as a white solid. 1HNMR (CDC13, 400 MHz) showed 8 7.15 (m, 1H), 6.84 (m, 2H), 6.69 (m, 1H), 4.50 (s, 2H), 2.90 (m, 2 H), 1.95 (d, 3H).
Compound 13 (200 mg, 0.01 mmol) was dissolved in CH2C12 (1.5 mL) and DM] (20 mg) was added while the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h. 11-1NM1 .
(CDCI3, 400 MHz) showed 8 9.74 (s, 11-1), 7.17 (m, 1H), 6.86 (m, 211), 6.74 (m, 1H), 4.48 (s, 2H), 4.15 (m, 2H), 2.78(m, 1H), 1.22 (d, 311). To the mixture was added saturated NaHCO3 (0.5 mL) and Na2S203 (0.5 mL) and stirring continued at room temperature for 1 h. The above work-up procedure was followed (CH2C12 solution, precipitated from ether) to give 9 (142 mg) as a white solid.
B) Generation via Reaction with Aromatic Alcohols Activated polyalkylene glycols are synthesized by a Mitsunobu reaction between a polyalkylene glycol having a free terminal hydroxyl functionality and an aromatic alcohol.
The reaction scheme is outlined in Scheme VI.

Scheme VI:
(L)d P-OH _________________________________ T2 A ("Y)m __ (CH yH
HO¨T1 (L)d ______________________________ T2 00m __ (0-12), yH
P¨O¨Ti The polyalkylene glycol (P-OH) is reacted with an alcohol (K) to form the ether (L). In these compounds, m is zero or one, d is zero or an integer from one to four, and n is zero or an integer from one to five. Y is 0, S, CO, CO2, cos, SO, SO2, co', SO2NR', and NR'.
Ti and T2 are, independently, absent, or a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group.
R' and Z are, independently, hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated CI to C2o alkyl or heteroalkyl group.
Each L (if present) is, independently, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to C7 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl. The alkyl is a C1 to C20 saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, and the substituents can be halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulthydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aromatic moiety, heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, or alkylthio.
P is a polyalkylene glycol polymer. Usually, P-OH is polyethylene glycol (PEG) or monomethoxy polyethylene glycol (mPEG) having a molecular weight of 5, 000 to 40, 000 Da.
For example, a synthesis of mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde is outlined in Scheme VII.

Scheme VII:
HO ill HO
SOrPY 0 mPEG-OH
DMSO
DIAD, OH H PPh3, 14 15 cli2a2 -H

4-hydroxyphenylacetaldehyde (.1.1) was synthesized as described in Heterocycles, 2000, 53, 777-784. 4-Hydroxyphenethyl alcohol (Compound 14, 1.0 g, 7.3 mmol, Aldrich) was dissolved in dimethylsulfoxide (8 mi.., Aldrich). With stirring, 'TEA (2.2 mL, 16 mmol, Aldrich) was added slowly. Pyridine-sulfur trioxide (S03.py) complex (2.5 g, 16 mmol, Aldrich) was completely dissolved in dimethylsulfoxide (9 mL, Aldrich) and this solution was added drop-wise to the alcohol, with vigorous stirring. After stirring for 1 h at room temperature, the reaction was diluted with CH2Cl2, then washed with ice-cold water. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated to dryness.
Purification using silica gel chromatography with hexane-ethyl acetate as eluent (5:1, then 2:1) yielded 488 mg (49%) of 4-hydroxyphenylacetaldehyde (1.5).
mPEG-OH 20 kDa (101 mg, 0.005 mmol) and 4-hydroxyphenylacetaldehyde (15) (39 mg, 0.29 mmol) were azeotroped four times with toluene, then taken up in anhydrous CH2Cl2 (2 mL, Aldrich). To this solution was added triphenyIphosphine (PP113; 66 mg, 0.25 nunol, Aldrich) and then diisopropylazodicarboxylate (DIAD; 49 pl.., 0.25 mmol, Aldrich) with stirring. After 3 days of stirring at room temperature, the reaction mixture was added drop-wise to vigorously-stirred diethyl ether. The resulting precipitate was isolated by filtration and washed three times with diethyl ether. The crude material was taken up in CH2Cl2 and washed with water. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated to dryness.
The material was taken up in minimum CH2C12, then precipitated by adding drop-wise to stirred diethyl ether. This material was collected by filtration, washed three times with diethyl ether and dried to give 63 mg (62%) of mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde (16).
A synthesis of mPEG-0-p-phenylpropionaldehyde (17) was prepared in a similar manner.

4-hydroxyphenylpropionaldehyde was prepared by a synthesis analogous to that for 4-hydroxyphenylacetaldehyde (Heterocycles, 2000, 53, 777-784). 3-(4-Hydroxypheny1)-1-propanol (1.0 g, 6.6 mmol, Aldrich) was dissolved in dimethylsulfoxide (8 mL, Aldrich). TEA
(2.0 mL, 14 mmol, Aldrich) was added slowly with stirring. Pyridine-sulfur trioxide (S03.py) complex (2.3 g, 15 mmol, Aldrich) was completely dissolved in dimethylsulfoxide (9 mL, Aldrich) and this solution was added drop-wise to the alcohol, with vigorous stirring. After stirring for 1 h at room temperature, the reaction was diluted with CH2C12, then washed with ice-cold water. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated to dryness. Purification using silica gel chromatography with hexane-ethyl acetate as eluent (5:1, then 2:1) yielded 745 mg (75%) of 4-hydroxyphenylpropionaldehyde.
mPEG-OH 20 kna (100 mg, 0.005 mmol) and 4-hydroxyphenylpropionaldehyde (40 mg, 0.27 mmol) were azeotroped four times with toluene, then taken up in anhydrous CH2C12 (2 mL, Aldrich). To this solution was added triphenylphosphine (66 mg, 0.25 nunol, Aldrich) and then diisopropylazodicarboxylate (49 p.L, 0.25 mmol, Aldrich) with stirring. After 3 days stirring at room temperature :the reaction mixture was added drop-wise to vigorously-stirred diethyl ether. The resulting precipitate was isolated by filtration and washed three times with diethyl ether. The crude material was taken up in CH2C12 and washed with water. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated to dryness. The material was taken up in minimum CH2C12, then precipitated by adding drop-wise to stirred diethyl ether. This material was collected by filtration, washed three times with diethyl ether and dried to give 60 mg (60%) of mPEG-0-p-phenylpropionaldehyde (12).
mPEG-0-m-phenylacetaldehyde (Th) was also prepared in this way.

3-hydroxyphenylacetaldehyde was prepared by a synthesis analogous to that of 4-hydroxyphenylacetaldehyde (Heterocycles, 2000, 53, 777-784). 3-Hydroxyphenethyl -alcohol (1.0 g, 7.5 mmol, Aldrich) was dissolved in dimethylsulfoxide (8 mL, Aldrich).
TEA (2.0 mL, 14 mmol, Aldrich) was added slowly with stirring. Pyridine-sulfur trioxide (S03.py) complex (2.4 g, 15 rnmol, Aldrich) was completely dissolved in dimethylsulfoxide (8 rriL, Aldrich) and this solution was added drop-wise to the alcohol, with vigorous stirring.
After stirring for 1 h at room temperature, the reaotion was quenched with ice-cold water, then extracted with C1-12C12. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated to dryness.
Purification using silica gel chromatography with hexane-ethyl acetate as eluent (3:1, then 1:1) yielded 225 mg (22%) of 3-hydroxyphenylacetaldehyde.
mPEG-OH 20 kDa (307 mg, 0.015 mmol) and 3-hydroxyphenylacetaidehyde (117 mg, 0.86 mmol) were azeotroped four times with toluene, then taken up in anhydrous CH2C12 (5 mL, Aldrich). To this solution was added triphenylphosphine (200 mg, 0.76 mmol, Aldrich) and then diisopropylazodicarboxylate (147 JAL, 0.75 mmol, Aldrich) with stirring. After 3 days of stirring at room temperature, the reaction mixture was added drop-wise to vigorously-stirred diethyl ether. The resulting precipitate was isolated by filtration and washed three times with diethyl ether and dried to yield 284 mg (93%) of niPEG-0-m-phenylacetaldehyde (18).
..
Chiral PEG-cinnarnate-N-hydroxy succinirnate (NHS) compounds are generated, for example, as shown in Schemes VIII and IX:
Scheme VIII
k.
...õme Me Me 0____ 0 1.112/Pd ,-, 2. Me-PEG-OWMitsunobu OEt =0 1. Sliarplcss AD
101 4. DCC/HO-NHS
la-111 .
2. acid/acetone).
lin0 PEG' 0 CO2Et CO2.NHS
Bn0 0 /aq. acid PEG, 110 , N

=
21 ¨ 22 T.:
PEG5H PEG, 40 OH
.......
dihydroxydihydrocinnamate r Scheme IX
1. IDA/Lcwis ncid = t5 2.
C),SilAciimid.424) 4 OSIMe, 0 cH 3. }WU
..------..\...---.../". 4. Me=TE0-011/Mitsunobu I ..,.. 5. al:1NaOH
Chlmi AuM4ary Me PEE,..., 0 =
Mn .../.07/

, PEG .
---. 0 Me 0-WS
PEG.õ,,..0 11101 The 0-NHS

F.

...E
PEG,..... 0 $1 PEG.õ, 0 $14., a-Methyl-P-hydroxycinnarnate PEG-Dihydrourocartate-NHS compounds are also generated via a Mitsunobu reaction, as shown in Scheme X:
Scheme X
o o 27 ........õ-...---õ,õ:õ.õ../L
N........k. 1. SOC1e0H ( I
N OMe OH
< I 2. Me-PEG-OH/
N
N Mitsunobu /
H _________________ w PEG
urocanic acid +

PEG
I
1. H2/Pd /N------"A'"H'' LOA4e 2. ACC/HO-NHS
.\\ I
1\1"----\ N--___7`\-----L-0-NHS
N O-NHS + < 1 ( I N"."-j N"--- i ._ .

r PEG-Dihydrocinnamate-NHS compounds are also generated from an aromatic alcohol as shown in Scheme ):
Scheme XI

PPh3, DEAD, THE

.---mPEG-OH I' mPEG,o SI CI" Li0 - _T4 mPEG,o OH ___ "..
ill OH mPEG,o I. 0 01,1 32 .,..._./0 33 PEG-benzofurans and PEG-indoles are generated as shown in Schemes X11 and Xal:
Scheme )(a HO 0 ...,- ........0 PEG-- a i. Pd(0)/CO/Me0H
2. Me-PEG-0Tf/base OH 0 002Me __________________________________ >

I. Na$H4/Me011 2. Dess-Martin Ox.
PEG

Scheme Mil NH2 NH-Bac P

1. (Boc)20/base 2. Me-PEG-0Tf 1. aq TFA
fr 2. inaleoyl chloride 101 \ /

C.) Generation via Reaction of PEG-Amines PEG amines are reacted with alkyl halides to generate PEG-amides. An example of the generation of a PEG-amide-bicyclooctane-NHS conjugate is shown in Scheme XIV:
Scheme XIV
CO2Et 411101el* CO2Et 1. LiBli4 2. Dess-Martin Ox.
3. Ph3/3=CHCO2Et H2/Pd 5. NaOH
6. DCC/HO-NHS
O-NHS
PEG'' o A PEG-primary amine is conjugated with an aryl-halide to form a PEG-secondary amine conjugate, which is then reacted under Heck conditions (a stereospecific Palladium-catalyzed coupling of an alkene with an organic halide or triflate lacking sp3 hybridized (3-hydrogens) with an NHS-alkene to form the desired PEG-conjugate. The synthesis ota -pyrimidine-containing conjugate is shown in Scheme XV:

( Scheme XV
PEG,,,,. ....õ..õ---..õ.õ.õ..õ,...NH2 -I-H
N
CI N CI PEG.,_ '.....õ....--........,.......õ.õõ..N
-'0 I

N...õ...õ:õ........../,--' ,....õ....,-- N
cos Heck conditions H
PEG...õ, õ....õ---..õ,.....õ...õ..N..,,........7õ.....--N.
0 a-NHS
I
41 N..,.........137õ..- -"' PEG-sulfonamide conjugates are also synthesized in this manner, as shown in Scheme XVI:
Scheme XVI
PEG,, ....õ----...,,,,..õ,..NH2 +
base H

_____ PEG..., %
00= 42 I
--'.-.." -----.''''CO2-NHS /
Heck conditions H
PEG,, N,.., et O-NHS

0/1 % 43 0 dihydrocinnamate-3-su1fonamide and ( PEG,, .7".. .,,,,,. NH2 base PEG, ¨
i CO2-NHS Heck conditions -",µ-µ--411:1 0-NHS
H

A

Dihydrocinnamate4-sulfonamide D) Compounds Generated via Reaction with Heterocycles PEG compounds are reacted with ring- or non-ring nitrogens in heterocycles to form reactive PEG species. Representative reactions are shown in Schemes XVII for arninopyrrolidine and XVIII for various piperazines:
Scheme XVII
'0 H

+ 0 ..._ 1. EDC/HATO PEG, 7-...õ......v.......N.õ..,õ........\
/2. HyPd N
3. ally] bromide/bav 0 "-----.7 -......Cbz 1. BH3-THF;11202/base /
2. Dess-Martin Ox.
El PEG-..õ0õ/`=.õ.._,,..,N / __ -CHO
N _______________________________________________________ --Scheme XVII
1. triflic anhydride linnig's base piperazine N
3. 3-bromopropylmaleimide r j PEG, I

l. tithe anhydride =
Hunig's base 2. piperazine 3. aerylonitrile O%
4. NaBH4/CoC13 5. H2C---CH-S020 1. triflic anhydride Hunig's base 0 2. piperazine 3. succinic anhydride PEG 01-1 4. ACC/HO-NHS

EXAMPLE 2: Preparation of peptide conjugates 5 The peptide conjugates according to the present invention can be prepared by reacting a protein with an activated PGC molecule. For example, interferon (IFN) can be reacted with a PEG-aldehyde in the presence of a reducing agent (e.g., sodium cyanoborohydride) via reductive allcylation to produce the PEG-protein conjugate, attached via an amine linkage. See, e.g., European Patent 0154316 Bl.
10 Human EN-f3-la was PEGylated with the following activated polyalkylene glycols of the invention: 20 kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde, 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-methylphenyi-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde, 20 kDa mPEG-0-722-methylpheny1-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde, 20 kDa rriPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde, 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylpropionaIdehyde, and 20 kDa niPEG-0-m-phenylacetaldehyde. The PEGylated proteins were purified to homogeneity 15 from their respective reaction mixtures and subjected to a series of characterization tests to ascertain the identity, purity, and potency of the modified proteins.
A detailed description of the preparation and characterization of human LEN-13-1a modified with 20 kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde, 20 kDa mPEG-0-7n-methylphenyl-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde, and 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde follows.

A) Preparation and Characterization of 20 kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFI\T- la- la Human IFN-13-1a was PEGylated at its N-terminus with 20 kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde. The product of the reductive alkylation chemistry used to incorporate the PEG onto the IFN-P-la backbone resulted in the formation of an amine linkage which is extremely stable against degradation. The PEGylated IFN-P-la was subjected to extensive characterization, including analysis by SDS-PAGE, size exclusion chromatography (SEC), peptide mapping, and assessment of activity in an in vitro antiviral assay.
The purity of the product, as measured by SDS-PAGE and SEC, was greater than 90%. In the PEGylated sample there was no evidence of aggregates. Residual levels of unmodified TFN-p-la in the product were below the limit of quantitation, but appear to represent about 1%
of the product.
The specific activity of the PEGylated IFN-p-la in the antiviral activity assay was reduced approximately 2-fold compared to the unmodified IFN-P-la (EC50 = 32 pg/mL for 20 kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-r3-1a versus EC50= 14 pg/mL for unmodified IFN-P-1a). The PEGylated IFN-P-la bulk was formulated at 30 p.g/mL
in phosphate-buffered saline (PBS) pH 7.3, containing 14 mg/mL human serum albumin (HSA), similar to the formulation used for AVONEX (Biogen, Cambridge, MA) which has been subjected to extensive characterization. The material was supplied as a frozen liquid which was stored at ¨7() C.
The properties of 20 kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modifiedIFN-P-1a are summarized in Table 1:
Table 1. Properties of 20 kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-p-la Pegylation efficiency >90%
1PN-13-la/PEG ratio 1:1 Purity >90%
Site of attachment N-terminus Antiviral activity EC50 32 pg/mL
1. Preparation of 20 kDa mPEG-0-2-methy1propiona1de1yde-modified IFN-(3-1a.
10 mL of nonforrnulated AVONEX (TN-P-1a bulk intermediate, a clinical batch of bulk drug that passed all tests for use in humans, at 250 ug/mL in 100 mM sodium phosphate pH
7.2, 200 rriM NaC1) was diluted with 12 mL of 165 mM MES pH 5.0 and 50 iL of 5 N HC1.
The sample was loaded onto a 3001.1L SP-Sepharose FF column (Pharmacia). The column was washed with 3 x 300 fiL of 5 mM sodium phosphate pH 5.5, 75 mlYINaC1, and the protein was eluted with 5 rnM sodium phosphate pH 5.5, 600 mM NaCl. Elution fractions were analyzed for their absorbance at 280 run and the concentration of IFN-f3-1a in the samples estimated using an extinction coefficient of 1.51 for a 1 mg/mL solution. The peak fractions were pooled to give an LEN-f3-la concentration of 3.66 nag/mL, which was subsequently diluted to 1.2 ing/mL with water.
To 0.8 mL of the IFN-(3-la from the diluted SP-Sepharose eluate pool, 0.5 M
sodium phosphate pH 6.0 was added to 50 mM, sodium cyanoborohydride (Aldrich) was added to 5 mM, and 20 kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde was added to 5 rag/mL. The sample was incubated at room temperature for 16 h in the dark. The PEGylated IFN-f3-la was purified from the reaction mixture on a 0.5 mL SP-Sepharose FF column as follows: 0.6 mL of the reaction mixture was diluted with 2.4 niL 20 mM MES pH 5.0, and loaded on to the SP-Sepharose column. The column was washed with sodium phosphate pH 5.5, 75 inM
NaC1 and then the PEGylated IFN-f3-la was eluted from the column with 25 mM NIES pH
6.4, 400 mM
Naa The PEGylated IFN-0-1a was further purified on a Superose 6 HR 10/30 FPLC
sizing column with 5 mM sodium phosphate pH 5,5, 1 50 mM NaC1 as the mobile phase.
The sizing column (25 mL) was run at 20 mL/h and 0.5 mL fractions were collected. The elution fractions were analyzed for protein content by absorbance at 280 run, pooled, and the protein concentration of the pool determined. The PEGylated IFN-P-la concentration is reported in IFN equivalents as the PEG moiety does not contribute to absorbance at 280 nm.
Samples of the pool were removed for analysis, and the remainder was diluted to 30 1.1g/mL with HSA-containing formulation buffer, aliquoted at 0.25 mL/vial, and stored at ¨70 C.
2. UV spectrum of purified 20 kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-0-1a. The UV spectrum (240-340 nm) of 20 kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-fl-la was obtained using the pre-HSA-formulated bulk sample. The PEGylated sample exhibited an absorbance maximum at 278-279 nm and an absorbance minimum at 249-250 run, consistent with that observed for the unmodified IFN-P-la bulk intermediate. The protein concentration of the PEGylated product was estimated from the spectrum using an extinctioneoefficient of c28,0111% = 1.51. The protein concentration of the PEGylated bulk was 0.23 mg,/mL. No turbidity was present in the sample as evident by a lack of absorbance at 320 nm.

3. Characterization of 20 kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-P-la by SDS-PAGE. 4 ug of unmodified and 20 kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-P-la were subjected to SDS-PAGE under reducing conditions on a 10-20%
gradient gel.
The gel was stained with Coomassie brilliant blue R-250, and is shown in Figure 1 (Lane A, molecular weight markers (from top to bottom; 100 kDa, 68 kDa, 45 kDa, 27 kDa, and 18 kDa, respectively); Lane B, unmodified 1FN-P-la; Lane C, 20 kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-P-1a). SDS-PAGE analysis of 20 kDa inPEG-0-methylpropionaldehyde-modified EFN-P-la revealed a single major band with an apparent mass of 55 kDa, consistent with modification by a single PEG. No higher mass forms resulting from the presence of additional PEG groups were detected. In the purified, PEGylated product, unmodified IFN-P-la was detected; however, the amount is below the limit of quantitation. The level of unmodified IFN-13-la in the preparation is estimated to account for only about 1% of the total protein.
4. Characterization of 20 kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-13-1a by size exclusion chromatography. Unmodified and 20 kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified EFN-P-la were subjected to SEC on an analytical Superose 6 HR10/30 FPLC sizing column using PBS pH 7.2 as the mobile phase. The column was run at mL/h and the eluent monitored for absorbance at 280 nm, as shown in Figure 2:
Panel A:
20 molecular weight standards (670 kDa, thyroglobulin; 158 kDa, gamma globulin; 44 kDa, ovalbumin; 17 kDa, myoglobin; 1.3 kDa, vitamin B12), Panel B: 20 kDa naPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-P-I a; Panel C: unmodified IFN-P-la. The 20 kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-P-la eluted as a single sharp peak with an apparent molecular mass of approximately 200 kDa, consistent with the large hydrodynamic volume of the PEG. No evidence of aggregates was observed. Unmodified IFN-P-la in the preparation was detected kit was below the limit of quantitation. Based on the size of the peak, the unmodified IFN-P-la accounts for 1% or less of the product, consistent with that observed using SDS-PAGE.
5. Analysis of 20 kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN43-1a by peptide mapping. The specificity of the PEGylation reaction was evaluated by peptide mapping. Unmodified and 20 kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified were digested with endoproteinase Lys-C from Achromobacter (Wako Bioproducts) and the resulting cleavage products were fractionated by reverse-phase IIPLC on a Vydac C4 column using a 30 min gradient from 0 to 70% acetonitrile, in 0.1% IA. The column eluent was monitored for absorbance at 214 nm.
All of the predicted peptides from the endoproteinase Lys-C digest of IFN-P-la have been identified previously by N-terminal sequencing and mass spectrometry (Pepinslcy et al., (2001) J Pharmacology and Experimental Therapeutics 297:1059), and, of these, only the peptide that contains the N-terminus of IFN-P-la was altered by modification with 20 kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde; as evident by its disappearance from the peptide map.
The mapping data therefore indicate that the PEG moiety is specifically attached to this peptide. The data further indicate that the PEG modification is targeted at the N-terminus of the protein since only the N-terminal modification would result in the specific loss of this peptide.
13) Preparation and Characterization of 20 IcDa mPEG-0-m-methylpheny1-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-f3-1a Human IFN-13-la was PEGylated at the N-terminus with 20 kDa mPEG-0-m-methylpheny1-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde. The product of the reductive alkylation chemistry that was used to incorporate the PEG onto the IFN-13-la backbone results in the formation of an amine linkage which is extremely stable against degradation. The PEGylated IFN-13-la was subjected to extensive characterization, including analysis by SDS-PAGE, SEC, peptide mapping, and assessment of activity in an in vitro antiviral assay. The purity of the product as measured by SDS-PAGE and SEC was greater than 95%. In the PEGylated IFN-13-la sample there was no evidence of aggregates. Residual levels of unmodified IFN-13-la in the product were below the limit of quantitation, but appear to represent about 1% of the product. The specific activity of the PEGylated IFN-13-1a in the antiviral activity assay was reduced approximately 2-fold compared to the unmodified IFN-f3-la (EC5o=-- 31 pg/mL
for 20 kDa mPEG-0-m-methylpheny1-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-(3-1a versus EC50 = 14 pg/mL for unmodified IFN-(3-1a). The PEGylated IFN-f3-la bulk was formulated at 30 pg/mL
in PBS pH 7.2 containing 15 mg/mL HSA, similar to the formulation used for AVONEX
which has been subjected to extensive characterization. The material was supplied as a frozen liquid which was stored at ¨70 C.
The properties of 20 kDa mPEG-0-m-methylpheny1-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-P-la are summarized in Table 2:

Table 2. Properties of 20 kDa rnPEG-0-m-methylpheny1-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-f3-1a PEGylation efficiency >80%
IFN-f3-1a/PEG ratio =1:1 Purity >95%
Site of attachment N-terminus Antiviral activity EC50 31 pg/mL
1. Preparation of 20 kDa mPEG-0-m-methylpheny1-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-13-1a. 80 mL of nonformulated AVONEX (IFN-13-la bulk intermediate, a clinical batch of bulk drug that passed all tests for use in humans, at 254 ughnL in 100 mM
sodium phosphate pH 7.2, 200 mM NaC1) was diluted with 96 mL of 165 mM MES pH
5.0, and 400 [IL of 5 N HC1. The sample was loaded onto a 1.2 mL SP-Sepharose FF
column (Pharmacia). The column was washed with 6.5 mL of 5 mM sodium phosphate pH
5.5, 75 mM NaC1, and the protein was eluted with 5 mM sodium phosphate pH 5.5, 600 mM
NaCl.
Elution fractions were analyzed for their absorbance at 280 nm and the concentration of IFN-f3-la in the samples was estimated using an extinction coefficient of 1.51 for a 1 mg/mL solution.
The peak fractions were pooled to give an IFN-13-la concentration of 4.4 mg/mL. To 2.36 mL
of the 4.4 mg/mL IFN-13-1a from the SP-Sepharose eluate pool, 0.5 M sodium phosphate pH
6.0 was added to 50 mM, sodium cyanoborohydride (Aldrich) was added to 5 mM, and 20 kDa mPEG-0-m-methylpheny1-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde, was added to 10 mg/mL. The sample was incubated at room temperature for 21 h in the dark. The PEGylated LEN-13-la was purified from the reaction mixture on a 8.0 rriL SP-Sepharose FF column as follows:
9.44 mL of reaction mixture was diluted with 37.7 mL of 20 mM MES pH 5.0, and loaded onto the SP-Sepharose column. The column was washed with sodium phosphate pH 5.5, 75 mM
NaC1 and then the PEGylated [FN-13-1 a was eluted from the column with 25 inM MES pH
6.4, 400 mM
NaCl. The PEGylated IFN-I3-1a was further purified on a Superose 6 HR 10/30 FPLC sizing column with 5 mM sodium phosphate pH 5.5, 150 mM NaC1 as the mobile phase. The sizing column (25 mL) was run at 24 mL/h and 0.25 mL fractions were collected. The elution fractions were analyzed for protein content by SDS-PAGE, pooled, and the protein concentration of the pool determined. The PEGylated IFN-13-1a concentration is reported in LPN equivalents after adjusting for the contribution of the PEG to the absorbance at 280 nm using an extinction coefficient of 2 for a 1 mg/mL solution of the PEGylated IFN-13-1a.
Samples of the pool were removed for analysis, and the remainder was diluted to 30 lagimL
with HSA-containing formulation buffer, aliquoted at 0.25 mL/vial, and stored at ¨70 C.

re-2. UV spectrum of purified 20 kDa mPEG-0-m-rnet1ylphenyl-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-f3-1a. The UV spectrum (240-340 nm) of 20 kDa rnPEG-O-m-methy1phenyl-Ci-2-methylpropiona1dehyde-modified IFN-P-la was obtained using the pre-HSA-fonnulated bulk sample. The PEGylated sample exhibited an absorbance maximum at 278-279 nm and an absorbance minimum at 249-250 nm, consistent with that observed for the unmodified PEN-f3-1a bulk intermediate. The protein concentration of the PEGylated product was estimated from the spectrum using an extinction coefficient of sno(LIN
= 2Ø The protein concentration of the PEGylated bulk was 0.42 mg/mL. No turbidity was present in the sample as evident by the lack of absorbance at 320 nm.
3. Characterization of 20 kDa mPEG-0-m-methylpheny1-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-(1-la by SDS-PAGE. 2.1 pg of 20 kDa mPEG-0-m-methylpheny1-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified ]FN-13-la was subjected to SDS-PAGE under reducing conditions on a 4-20% gradient gel. The gel was stained with Coornassie brilliant blue R-250.
SDS-PAGE analysis of 20 kDa mPEG-0-m-methylpheny1-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-P-la revealed a single major band with an apparent mass of 55 kDa consistent with modification by a single PEG. In the purified PEGylated product unmodified IFN-I3-la was detected; however, the amount is below the limit of quantitation. It is estimated that the level of unmodified IFN-f3-la in the preparation accounts for only about 1% of the total protein.
4. Characterization of 20 kDa mPEG-0-m-methylpheny1-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified UN-13-1a by size exclusion chromatography. 20 kDa mPEG-0-m-methylpheny1-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-f3-1a was subjected to SEC on an analytical Superose 6 HR10/30 FPLC sizing column using PBS pH 7.0 as the mobile phase. The column was run at 24 mL/h and the eluent was monitored for absorbance at 280 nm. The PEGylated eluted as a single sharp peak with no evidence of aggregates (Figure 3).
5. Analysis of 20 kDa mPEG-0-nz-methy1pheny1-0-2-methylnrooiona1dehyde-modified IFN-i3-1a by peptide mapping. The specificity of the PEGylation reaction was evaluated by peptide mapping. 13_3 ug of unmodified and 20 kDa mPEG-0-m-methylphenyl-_ 0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-13-1a were digested with 20% (w/w) of endoproteinase Lys-C from Achromobacter (Wako Bioproducts) in PBS containing 5 inM
D 1 mlvl EDTA, at pH 7.6, at room temperature for 30 h (final volume 100 !,11õ). 4 iT of 1 M DTT and 100 pi, of 8 M urea were then added and the samples incubated for 1 h at room temperature. The peptides were separated by reverse-phase HPLC on a Vydac Cu column (214TP51) using a 70 min gradient from 0-63% acetonitile, in 0.1% TFA, followed by a 10 min gradient from 63-80% acetonitrile, in 0.1% TFA. The column eluent was monitored for absorbance at 214 nm.
A1I of the predicted peptides from the endoproteinase Lys-C digest of IFN-R-la have been identified previously by N-terminal sequencing and mass spectrometry (Pepinsky et al., (2001) J Pharmacology and Experimental Therapeutics 297:1059), and, of these, only the peptide that contains the N-terminus of IFN-(3-1a was altered by modification with 20 kDa mPEG-0-ni-methylpheny1-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde; as evident by its disappearance from the map. The mapping data therefore indicate that the PEG moiety is specifically attached to this peptide. The data further indicate that the PEG modification is targeted at the N-temiinus of the protein since only the N-terminal modification would result in the specific loss of this peptide.
C) Preparation and Characterization of 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde-modified IFN-R-la Human LFN-R-la was PEGylated at the N-termitius with 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde. The product of the reductive alkylation chemistry that was used to incorporate the PEG onto the IFN-R-la backbone results in the formation of an amine linkage which is extremely stable against degradation. The PEGylatedlFN-R-la was subjected to extensive characterization, including analysis by SDS-PAGE, SEC, peptide mapping, and assessment of activity in an in vitro antiviral assay. The purity of the product as measured by SDS-PAGE and SEC was greater than 95%. In the PEGylated IFN-R-la sample there was no evidence of aggregates. Residual levels of unmodified IFN-R-la in the product were below the limit of quantitation, but appear to represent about 1% of the product. ln a stability test, no aggregation or degradation of 20 kDa niPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde-modified IFN-P-la was evident in Tris-buffer pH 7.4, following an incubation at 37 C for up to 7 days. The specific activity of the PEGylated IFN-R-la in the antiviral activity assay was reduced approximately 2-fold compared to the unmodified IFN-R-la (EC50 = 31 pg/mL for 20 kDa _ phenylacetaldehyde-modified IFN-R-la versus EC.50= 14 pg/mL for unmodified LEN-(3-la).

The PEGylated IFN-P-la bulk was formulated at 30 ptg/mL in PBS pH 7.3 containing 14 mg/mL HSA, similar to the formulation used for AVONEX which has been subjected to extensive characterization. The material was supplied as a frozen liquid which was stored at ¨70 'C.
The properties of 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde-modified IFN-13-la are summarized in Table 3:
Table 3. Properties of 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde-modified Pegylation efficiency >80%
IFN-13-1a/PEG ratio 1:1 Purity >95%
Site of attachment N-terminus Antiviral activity E050 31 pg/mL
1. Preparation of 20 IDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldeh_yde-modified IFN-P-la. 20 mL
of nonformulated AVONEX0 (IFN-P-la bulk intermediate, a clinical batch of bulk drag that passed all tests for use in humans, at 25011g/mL in 100 mM sodium phosphate pH
7.2, 200 inM NaC1) was diluted with 24 mL of 165 mM MES pH 5.0, 100 of 5 N HC1, and 24 rriL
water. The sample was loaded onto a 600 i.tL SP-Sepharose FF column (Pharmacia). The column was washed with 2 x 900 gL of 5 mM sodium phosphate pH 5.5, 75 mM NaC1, and the protein was eluted with 5 mM sodium phosphate pH 5.5, 600 mM NaCl. Elution fractions were analyzed for their absorbance at 280 nm and the concentration oil:EN-P-1a in the samples was estimated using an extinction coefficient of 1.51 for a 1 mg/mL solution.
The peak fractions were pooled to give an IFN-P-la concentration of 2.3 mg/mL. To 1.2 mL of the WN-P-la from the SP-Sepharose eluate pool, 0.5 M sodium phosphate pH 6.0 was added to 50 na.M, sodium cyanoborohydride (Aldrich) was added to 5 m.M, and 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde, was added to 10 mg/mL. The sample was incubated at room temperature for 18 h in the dark. The PEGylated ITN-P-la was purified from the reaction mixture on a 0.75 mL SP-Sepharose FF column as follows: 1.5 mL of reaction mixture was diluted with 7.5 mL of 20 mM IVMS pH 5.0, 7.5 mL water, and 51.11, 5 N HC1, and loaded onto the SP-Sepharose column. The column was washed with sodium phosphate pH 5.5, 75 m/vf NaCI and then the PEGylated EFN-P-la was eluted from the column with 20 mM MES pH 6.0, 600 mM
NaCl. The PEGylated IFN-13-la was further purified on a Superose 6 HR 10/30 FPLC sizing column with 5 mM sodium phosphate pH 5.5, 150 m1VI NaC1 as the mobile phase.
The sizing column (25 mL) was run at 20 and 0.5 mL fractions were collected. The elution f fractions were analyzed for protein content by absorbance at 280 run, pooled, and the protein concentration of the pool determined. The PEGylated IFN-P-1 a concentration is reported in IFN equivalents after adjusting for the contribution of the PEG (20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde has an extinction coefficient at 280 nm of 0.5 for a 1 mg/mL solution) to the absorbance at 280 nm using an extinction coefficient of 2 for a 1 ing/mL
solution of the PEGylated ITN-í3-la. Samples of the pool were removed for analysis, and the remainder was diluted to 30 ttg/mL with HSA-containing formulation buffer, aliquoted at 0.25 mL/vial, and stored at ¨70 C.
2. UV spectrum of purified 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde-modified IFN-13-1a.
The UV spectrum (240-340 nm) of 20 kDa mF'EG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde-modified la was obtained using the pre-HSA-formulated bulk sample. The PEGylated sample exhibited an absorbance maximum at 278-279 tam and an absorbance minimum at 249-250 rim, consistent with that observed for the unmodified IFN-p-la bulk intermediate.
The protein concentration of the PEGylated product was estimated from the spectrum using an extinction coefficient of 8201% = 2Ø The protein concentration of the PEGylated bulk was 0.10 mg/mL. No turbidity was present in the sample as evident by the lack of absorbance at 320 nm.
3. Characterization of 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde-modified IFN-13-1a by SDS-PAGE. 2.5 }.tg of unmodified and 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde-modified IFN-P-1 a were subjected to SDS-PAGE under reducing conditions on a 10-20%
gradient gel.
The gel was stained with Coomassie brilliant blue R-250, and is shown in Figure 4 (Lane A: 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde-modified IFN-P-la; Lane B: unmodified IFN-P-la; Lane C: molecular weight markers (from top to bottom; 100 kDa, 68 kDa, 45 kDa, 27 kDa, and 18 kDa, respectively)). SDS-PAGE analysis of 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde-modified IFN-P-la revealed a single major band with an apparent mass of 55 kDa consistent with modification by a single PEG. No higher mass forms resulting from the presence of additional PEG groups were detected. In the purified PEGylated product unmodified IFN-13-1a was detected; however, the amount is below the limit of quantitation. It is estimated that the level of unmodified ]FN-f3-la in the preparation accounts for only about 1% of the total protein.

4. Characterization of 20 kDa mPEG-0-p:phenylacetaldehyde-modified 1EN-13-la by size exclusion chromatography. 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetalclehyde-modified ]FN-(3-I a was subjected to SEC on an analytical Superose 6 HR10/30 FPLC sizing column using PBS
pH 7.2 as the mobile phase. The column was mu at 20 niLih and the eluent was monitored for absorbance at 280 rim, as shown in Figure 5: Panel A: molecular weight standards (670 kDa, thyroglobulin; 158 kDa, gamma globulin; 44 kDa, ovalbumin; 17 kDa, myoglobin;
1.3 kDa, vitamin B12); Panel B: 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde-modified IFN-P-la.
The PEGylated IFN-P-la eluted as a single sharp peak with an apparent molecular mass of approximately 200 kDa consistent with the large hydrodynamic volume of the PEG. No evidence of aggregates was observed. Unmodified IFN-f3-1a in the preparation was detected but was below the limit of quantitation. Based on the size of the peak, the unmodified IFN-P-la accounts for 1% or less of the product, consistent with that observed using SDS-PAGE.
5. Analysis of 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde-modified IFN-13-1a by peptide mapping. The specificity of the PEGylation reaction was evaluated by peptide mapping.
Unmodified and 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde-modified IFN-P-la were digested with endoproteinase Lys-C from Achromobacter (Wako Bioproducts) and the resulting cleavage products were fractionated by reverse-phase HPLC on a Vydac C4 column using a 30 min gradient from 0 to 70% acetonitrile, in 0.1% TEA. The column eluent was monitored for absorbance at 214 nm.
All of the predicted peptides from the endoproteinase Lys-C digest of IFN-P-la have been identified previously by N-tenninal sequencing and mass spectrometry (Pepinsky et al., (2001) J Pharmacology and Experimental Therapeutics 297:1059), and, of these, only the peptide that contains the N-terminui of IFN-13-la was altered by modification with 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde; as evident by its disappearance from the map. The mapping data therefore indicate that the PEG moiety is specifically attached to this peptide. The data further indicate that the PEG modification is targeted at the N-terminus of the protein since only the N-terminal modification would result in the specific loss of this peptide.
6. Stability of 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde-modified fEN-1-1a. To test the stability of 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde-modified rEN-P-la, samples were diluted to 0.11..tgimL with 100 mM Tris-HC1 buffer, pH 7A, and were then incubated at 37 C for up to 7 days. 20 III, of sample (2 p.g) was removed at days 0, 2, 5, and 7, and analyzed by SDS-PAGE under reducing conditions, as shown in Figure 6: Lane A: molecular weight mii-kers (from top to bottom; 100 kDa, 68 kDa, 45 kDa, 27 kDa, 18 kDa, and 15 kDa, respectively);
Lanes B, C, D, and E: mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde-modified NN-f3-la removed at day 0, 2, 5, and 7, respectively. No evidence of aggregation or degradation of PEGylated IFN-f3-1a was observed even after 7 days at 37 C.
EXAMPLE 3. Specific activity of PEGylated human IFN-13-la in an in vitro antiviral assay The specific antiviral activity of PEGylated IFN-13-la samples was tested on human lung carcino-ma cells (A549 cells) that had been exposed to encephalomyocarditis (EMC) virus, and using the metabolic dye 2,3-bis[2-Methoxy-4-nitro-5-sulfo-pheny1]-2H-tetrazolium-5-carboxyanilide (MIT; M-5655, Sigma, St. Louis, MO) as a measure of metabolically-active cells remaining after exposure to the virus. Briefly, A549 cells were pretreated for 24 h with either unmodified or PEGylated IFN-f3-1a (starting at 66.7 pg/mL and diluting serially 1.5-fold to 0.8 pg/mL) prior to challenge with virus. The cells were then challenged for 2 days with EMC virus at a dilution that resulted in complete cell killing in the absence of IFN. Plates were then developed with MTT. A stock solution of MTT was prepared at 5 irighriL in PBS
and sterile-filtered, and 50 pL of this solution was diluted into cell cultures (100 uL per well).
Following incubation at room temperature for 30-60 min, the MTT/media solution was discarded, cells were washed with 100 ;AL PBS, and finally the metabolized dye was -solubilized with 100 L 1.2 N HC1 in isopropanol. Viable cells (as determined by the presence of the dye) were quantified by absorbance at 450 nm. Data were analyzed by plotting absorbance against the concentration of EN-¾-1a, and the activity of IFN-P-la was defined as the concentration at which 50% of the cells were killed i.e., the 50%
cytopathic effect (EC50) or 50% maximum 0D450. The assay was performed eight times for unmodified TEN-13-la and three to four times with the various PEGylated IFN-13-1a samples. For each assay, duplicate data points for each protein concentration were obtained. Representative plots of cell viability versus the concentration of unmodified or PEGylated IFN-13-1a are shown in Figures 7A and 7B. In Figure 7A, the symbols are as follows: unmodified IFN-13-1a (0), 20 kDa inPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified (0), 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-methylpheny1-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-13-la (A), and 20 kDa mPEG-0-m-methy1pheny1-methylpropionaldehyde-modified (o). In Figure 7B, the symbols are as follows:
unmodified LEN-P-la (0), 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde-modified (0), kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-P-la (A), and 20 kDa mPEG-0-m-phenylacetalclehyde-modified EFN-p-la (o).
The EC50 values (the concentration at half-maximal viral protection) for WN-f3-1a modified with 20 kDa rnPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde, 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-methylphenyl-0-2-methylpropionaldehycle, 20 kDa mPEG-0-m-methylpheny1-0-2-methyIpropionaldehyde, 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde, 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylpropionaldehyde, and kDa mPEG-0-m-phenylacetaldehyde are shown in Table 4. All PEGylated IFNs-J3-1a were modified and purified to homogeneity essentially as described for 20 kDa mPEG-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-P-la, 20 kDa mPEG-0-m-methylpheny1-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IEN-13-1a, and 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde-modified EN-13-la as described above.
Table 4. Specific antiviral activity of unmodified and PEGylatedIFNs-13-la Protein Mean ECse (Pg/m1) Unmodified IFN-43- la 14 (range 12-16) kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-f3-la 32 (range 26-37) 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-methylpheny1-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-13-la 41 (range 36-47) 20 kDa mPEG-0-m-methylpheny1-0-2-methylpropionaidehyde-modified IFN-f3-la 31 (range 27-35) 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldelvde-modified IFN-f3-1a 31 (range 25-39) 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-13-la 31 (range 27-34) -20 kDa mPEG-0-m-phenylacetaldehyde-modifiedIFN-13-la 27 (range 25-29) 15 EXAMPLE 4. Pharmaeokineties of intravenously-administered unmodified and PEGylated IFNs-f3-la in rats Canulated female Lewis rats were injected intravenously with either 80 fag/kg of unmodified IFN-P-la or 24 pg/kg of the following PEGylated1FNs-13-1a; 20 kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-13-1a, 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-methylpheny1-0-2-20 methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-f3-1a, 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde-modified 1FN-13-1a, 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylpropionaldehyde-modified lFN-13-1a, 20 kDa mPEG-0-m-phenylacetaldehyde-modified TEN-P-la, and 20 kDa mPEG-0-in-methylphenyl-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-13-1a. Both the unmodified and PEGylated proteins were formulated in the presence of 14-15 mg/m1., HSA as a carrier. For the unmodified protein, blood (0.2 mL) was obtained via the canula at different time points;
immediately prior to administration, and at 0.083, 0.25, 0_5, 1.25, 3, and 5 hours post-administration. For the PEGylated proteins, blood (0.2 mL) was obtained via the canula immediately prior to administration, and at 0.083, 0.25, 0.5, 1.25, 3, 24, 48, and 72 h post-administration. Whole blood was collected into serum separator tubes (Beckton Dickinson No. 365956) and incubated at room temperature for 60 min to allow for clotting. The clotted blood was centrifuged for 10 min at 4 C, and the serum removed and stored at ¨70 C until the time of assay.
The serum samples were then thawed and tested in antiviral assays. The serum samples were diluted 1:50 into serum-containing medium (Dulbecco's Modified Eagles Medium containing 10% (v/v) fetal bovine serum, 100 U each of penicillin and streptomycin, and 2 mM
L-glutamine) and tested in antiviral assays. Samples were titrated into designated wells of a 96 well tissue culture plate containing human lung carcinoma cells (A549, #CCL-185, ATCC, Rockville, MD). Dilutions of a standard (66.7, 44.4, 29.6, 19.8, 13.2, 8.8, 5.9, 3.9, 2.6, 1.7, 1.2, and 0.8 pg,/mL of the same form of IFN-fl-la administered to the rat) and of three serum samples were assayed on each plate. The A549 cells were pretreated -with diluted serum samples for 24 h prior to challenge with encephalomyelocarditis (EMC) virus.
Following a 2 day incubation with virus, viable cells were stained with a solution of MTT
(at 5 mg/rul. in phosphate buffer) for 1 h, washed with phosphate buffer, and solubilized with 1.2 N HC1 in isopropanol. The wells were then read at 450 run. Standard curves of the umnodified or PEGylated LEN-(3-la were generated for each plate and used to determine the amount of unmodified or PEGylated IFN-í3-la in each test sample. Pharmacokinetic parameters were then calculated using non-compactuiental analysis with WinNonLin version 3.0 or 3.3 software.
Figure 8A shows the concentration versus time plots for unmodified TEN-13-la (upper panel) and IFN-13-la modified with 20 kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde (lower panel), and Figure 8B shows the concentration versus time plots for IFN-P-la modified with 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-methylpheny1-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde (upper panel) and 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde (lower panel). Data points are averages from measurements from 3 rats.
Table 5 shows the pharmacokinetic parameters Cõ,aõ (maximal observed concentration), tin (elimination half-life) ATJC (area under the curve), Vss (distribution volume at steady state), clearance rate, and MRT (mean residence time) for unmodified IFN-43-la and these forms of PEGylated LFN-f3-1a. The data shown in Figures 8A and 88 and in Table 5 were obtained in the same study. - = -Figure 9A shows the concentration versus time plots for unmodified IFN-P-la (upper panel) and ITN-13-1a modified with 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-phenylpropionaldehyde (lower panel).
Data points are averages from measurements from 2 rats. Figure 9B shows the concentration versus time plots for IFN-f3-1 a modified with 20 kDa mPEG-0-m-phenylacetaldehyde (upper panel) and 20 kDa mPEG-0-nz-methylpheny1-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde (lower panel). Data points are averages from measurements from 3 rats.
Table 6 shows the pharrnacoldnetic parameters for unmodified IFN-f3-1a and these forms of PEGylated ITN-13-1a. The data shown in Figures 9A and 9D and in Table 6 were obtained in the same study; independent from the data shown in Figures 8A and 8B, and in Table 5.
As is clear from the data shown in Figures 8A, 8B, 9A, and 9B, and in Tables 5 and 6, PEGylation of IFN-13-la with the PEG molecules of the invention improves the pharmacokinetic properties of IFN-13-1a. In all cases, the PEGylated proteins were cleared less rapidly than unmodified ICEN-13-1a, resulting in clearance rates of 3.9-8.3 mL/h/kg as compared to 160-170 mL/h/kg for the unmodified protein. As a consequence of the reduced clearance rates, the mean residence time (MRT) increased from approximately 1 h for the unmodified protein to 4.8-7.6 h for the PEGylated proteins. Similarly, the elimination half-life (t112) increased from approximately 1 h for the unmodified protein to 5.2-13 h for the PEGylated proteins. The area under the curve (AUC) values were also significantly increased upon PEGylation of IFN-13-1a. For unmodified IFN-13-1a, the AUC was approximately 0.5 tig=h/mL
while for the PEGylated proteins the AUC values ranged from approxiniately 3 to 6 p.g.h/mL, despite the fact that the PEGylated proteins were dosed at a level 3.3-fold lower than the unmodified protein. For the maximal observed concentration (C), the values were generally higher for unmodified ITN-13-1a than for the PEGylated proteins, reflecting the lower dose of the modified proteins administered. For the volume of distribution at steady state (Vss), the values for all the PEGylated proteins were lower than for unmodified ITN-13-1a, indicating a restriction in their ability to exit the central blood compartment.

Table 5: Pharmaeoldnetie parameters for unmodified 1FN-13-1a, 20 kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-rnodified EN-13-1a, 20 kDa niPEG-0-p-methylpheny1-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-13-1a, and 20 lcDa mPEG-0-p-phenylacetaldehyde-modified IFN-f3-la following intravenous administration in rate Parameter Units Unmodified 20 kDa mPEG-0-2- 20 kDa mPEG-0-p- 20 kDa mPEG-0-p-1FN-13-1 a methylpropionaldehyde methylpheny1-0-2-phenylacetaldehyde--modified EFN-fl- I a m ethylpropion aldehyde-modified IFN-(3-1 a modified IFN-04 a pWmL 1,400,000 720,000 710,000 590,000 11/2h 0.98 13 11 6.8 AUC pg=h/mL 510,000 4,800,000 4,500,000 2,900,000 Vss mL/kg 160 39 40 53 Clearance mL/h/kg 160 5.0 5.3 8.3 MRT h 0.98 7.6 7.4 6.4 The pharrnacolcinetic data for the unmodified and PEGylated IFNs-f3-1a shown were obtained in the same study Table 6: Pharmaeolcinetie parameters for unmodified IF'N-13-1a, 20 kDa niPEG-0-p-phenylpropionaldebyde-modified IFN-13-1a, 20 kDa mPEG-0-m-phenylacetaldebyde-modified ITN-f3-1a, and 20 kDa inPEG-0-m-methylpheny1-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-13-1a following intravenous administration in rate Parameter Units Unmodified 20 kDa inPEG-0-p- 20 kDa rriPEG-0-m- 20 kDa mPEG-0-m-FN-/3-1 a phenylpropionaldehyde phenylacetaldehyde-methylpheny1-0-2--modified IFN-J3-1 a modified methylpropionaldehyde -modified IFN-J3-1 a pg/mL 670,000 930,000 550,000 700,000 0.92 5.2 7.7 7.1 AUC pg.h/mL 470,000 4,700,000 3,800,000 6,200,000 Vss mL/kg 140 25 . 46 21 Clearance mL/h/kg 170 5.1 6.4 3.9 MRT h 0.81 - 4.8 7.2 5.5 aThe pharmacokinetic data for the unmodified and PEGylated IFNs-13.-la shown were obtained in the same study.

EXAMPLE 5: Comparative pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics of unmodified and PEGylated human IFN-P-la in non-human prinaates Single and repeat dose comparative studies are conducted with unmodified and PEGylated EFN-fl-la to determine their relative stability and activity in non-human primates.
In these studies, the pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics of the PEGylated conjugates is compared to that of unmodified IFN-13-1a and reasonable inferences can be extended to humans.
Animals and Methods Study 1 (repeat dose) This is a parallel group, repeat dose study to evaluate the comparative pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics of unmodified and PEGylated IFN-(3-1a.
Healthy primates (e.g., rhesus monkeys) are used for this study. Prior to dosing, all animals are evaluated for signs of ill health by a laboratory animal veterinarian on two occasions within 14 days prior to test article administration; one evaluation must be within 24 h prior to the first test article administration. Only healthy ardmals receive the test article.
Evaluations include a general physical examination and pre-dose blood draws for baseline clinical pathology and baseline antibody level to 1FN-13-1a. A11 animals are weighed and body temperatures are recorded within 24 h. prior to test article administrations. Twelve subjects are enrolled and assigned to groups of three to receive r x 1o6 U/kg of unmodified or PEGylated IFN-0-1a, but otherwise identical IFN-13-1a. Administration is by either the subcutaneous (SC) or intravenous (IV) routes. Six male animals receive test article by the IV route (3 per treatment) and another 6 male animals receive test article by the SC route (3 per treatment). All animals must be naive to IFN-13 treatment. Each animal is dosed on two occasions, the doses are separated by four weeks. The dose volume is 1,0 mL/kg. Blood is drawn for pharmacokinetic testing at 0, 0.083, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 24, 48, 72, and at 96 hours following each injection. Blood samples for measurement of the IFN-induced biological response marker, serum neopterin, are drawn at 0, 24, 48, 72, 96, 168, 336, and at 504 h following administration of study drug. Evaluations during the study period include clinical observations performed 30 min and 1 h post-dose for signs of toxicity. Daily cage-side observations are performed and general appearance, signs of toxicity, discomfort, and changes in behavior are recorded. Body weights and body temperatures are recorded at regular intervals through 21 days post-dose.

Study 2 (single dose) This is a parallel group, single dose study to evaluate the comparative pbarmacoldnetics and pharm. acodynamics of unmodified and PEGylated EFN-13-1a. Healthy primates (e.g., rhesus monkeys) are used for this study. Prior to dosing, all animals are evaluated for signs of ill health by a laboratory animal veterinarian on two occasions within 14 days prior to test article administration; one evaluation must be within 24 h prior to the first test article administration. Only healthy animals receive the test article. Evaluations include a general physical examination and pre-dose blood draws for baseline clinical pathology and baseline antibody level to IFN-f3-1a. All animals are weighed and body temperatures are recorded within 24 h prior to test article administrations. Twenty subjects are enrolled and assigned to one of five groups of four animals (2 male and 2 female per group) to receive either 1 x 106 U/kg of unmodified or PEGylated IFN-13-1a intramuscularly (IM), or 2 x 105 U/kg, 1 x 106 U/kg, or 5 x 106 U/kg of PEGylated IFN-fl-la intravenously (IV). All animals must be naive to TEN-f3 treatment. The dose volume is generally 1.0 mL/kg. Blood is drawn for pharmacokinetic testing at 0, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 24, 36, 48, and at 96 hours, and at 7, 14, 21, and at 28 days following administration of study drug. Blood samples for measurement of the IFN-induced biological response marker, 2'-5'-oligoadenylate synthase (2'-5'-OAS), are drawn at 0, 12, 24, 48, 72, and at 96 hours, and at 7, 14, 21, and at 28 days following administration of study drug. Evaluations during the study period include clinical observations performed 30 min and 1 h post-dose for signs of toxicity. Daily cage-side observations are performed and general appearance, signs of toxicity, discomfort, and changes in behavior are recorded. Body weights and body temperatures are recorded at regular intervals through 28 days post-dose.
Assay Methods 25, Levels of IFN-13-1a in serum are quantitated using a cytopathic effect (CPE) bioassay.
The CPE assay measures levels of PEN-mediated antiviral activity. The level of antiviral activity in a sample reflects the number of molecules of active IFN contained in that sample at the time the blood is drawn. This approach has been the standard. method to assess the pharmacolcinetics of IFN-13. The CPE assay detects the ability of IFN-13 to protect human lung carcinoma cells (A549, #CCL-185, ATCC, Rockville, MD) from cytotoxicity due to eneephalomyocarditis (EMC) virus. The cells are preincubated for 15-20 h with serum samples to allow the induction and synthesis of LEN-inducible proteins that are responSible for the antiviral response. EMC virus is then added and incubated for a further 30 h before assessment of cytotoxicity is made using a crystal violet stain. An internal IFN-f3 standard as well as a PEGylated IFN-13-1a internal standard is tested concurrently with samples on each assay plate. This standard is calibrated against a natural human fibroblast IEN reference standard (WHO Second International Standard for Interferon, Human Fibroblast, (3b-23-902-53). Each assay plate also includes cell growth control wells containing neither IFN-13 of any ldnd nor EMC, and virus control wells that contain cells and EMC but no IFN-13. Control plates containing the standard and samples are also prepared to determine the effect, if any, of the samples on cell growth. These plates are stained without the addition of virus. Samples and standards are tested in duplicate on each of two replicate assay plates, yielding four data points per sample. The geometric mean concentration of the four replicates is reported. The limit of detection in this assay is 10 U/mL. Serum concentrations of neopterin are determined at the clinical pharmacology unit using commercially-available assays. Serum concentrations of 2'-5'-OAS are determined at a contract laboratory using a validated commercially-available assay.
Pharmacokinetic and Statistical Methods RstriPrm software (MicroMath, Inc., Salt Lake City, UT) is used to fit data to pharmacokinetic models. Geometric mean concentrations are plotted by time for each group.
Since assay results are expressed in dilutions, geometric means are considered more appropriate than arithmetic means. Serum IFN levels are adjusted for baseline values and non-detectable serum concentrations are set to 5 U/mL, which represents one-half the lower limit of detection. For IV infusion data, a two compartment IV infusion model is fit to the detectable serum concentrations for each subject, and the SC data are fit to a two compartment injection model.
The following pharmacokinetic parameters are calculated:
(i) observed peak concentration, Cmax (U/mL);
(ii) area under the curve from 0 to 48 h, AUC (U x h/mL) using the trapezoidal rule;
(iii) elimination half-life (h);
and, from IV infusion data (if IV is employed):
(iv) distribution half-life (h);
(v) clearance (mL/h/kg) (vi) apparent volume of distribution, Vd (mL/kg).

WinNonlin (Version 1.0, Scientific Consulting Inc., Apex, NC) software is used to calculate the elimination half-Iives after IV and SC injection. For neopterin and 2'-5'-OAS, arithmetic means by time are presented for each group. Em, the maximum change from baseline, is calculated. Crnaõ, AUC, and Emax are submitted to a one-way analysis of variance to compare dosing groups. Cmax and ALTC are logarithmically-transformed prior to analysis;
geometric means are reported.
EXAMPLE 6: Anti-angiogenic effects of PEGylated human IFN-13-la; the ability of PEGylated IFN-13-la to inhibit endothelial cell proliferation in vitro Human venous endothelial cells (Cell Systems, Cat. # 2V0-P75) and human dermal microvascular endothelial cells (Cell Systems, Cat # 2M1-C25) are maintained in culture with CS-C Medium Kit (Cell Systems, Cat. # 4Z0-500). 24 h prior to the experiment, cells are trypsinized, and resuspended in assay medium, 90% M199 and 10% fetal bovine serum (FBS), and are adjusted to desired cell density. Cells are then plated onto gelatin-coated 24 or 96 well plates, either at 12, 500 cells/well or 2, 000 cells/well, respectively. After overnight incubation, the assay medium is replaced with fresh medium containing 20 ng/naL of human recombinant basic Fibroblast Growth Factor (bFGF) (Becton Dickinson, Cat. #
40060) and various concentrations of unmodified or PEGylated IFN-0-la of the invention or positive control (endostatin can be used as a positive control, as could an antibody to bFGF) are added.
The final volume is adjusted to 0.5 mL in the 24 well plate or 0.2 mL in the 96 well plate.
After 72 h, cells are trypsini7ed for Coulter counting, frozen for CyQuant fluorescence reading, or labeled with [311]-thymidine. This in vitro assay tests the PEGylated human IFN-13-la molecules of the invention for effects on endothelial cell proliferation which may be indicative of anti-angiogenic effects in vivo. See O'Reilly, et al., Cell 88: 277-285 (1997).
EXAMPLE 7: In vivo models to test anti-angiogenic and neovascularization effects of PEGylated human ]FN-J3-1.a and PEGylated rodent IF1s-f3 Unmodified IFN-13-1 a and 20 kDa rnPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified a were tested for their ability to inhibit the formation of radially-oriented vessels entering the periphery of SK-MEL-1 human malignant melanoma tumors in athymic nude homozygous (nu/nu) mice. SK-MEL-1 cells were grown in culture to 80% confluency, and then 2 x 106 cells inoculated intradermally (0.1 mL volume on day 0) into the flank in the mid-axillary line in three week old athyrnic nude homozygous (nu/nu) NCR mice (Taconic, GennantoWn, NY).

24 hours later (day 1), groups of three rnice each received the following subcutaneous doses of vehicle control, unmodified LEN-f3-1a, or 20 kDa rnPEG-0-2-met1iy1propiona1dehyde-modified IFN-13-1a:
Group A: 0.1 mL of 45.6 mg/mL human serum albumin (vehicle control) once on day I
only Great') B: 0.1 mL of 45.6 mg/mL human serum albumin containing 1 MU (5 ,g) of unmodified IFN-13-la daily on days 1-9 inclusive Group C: 0.1 mL of 45.6 mg/mL human serum albumin containing I MU units (10 ug) of 20 kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-13-1a once on day 1 only Group D: 0.1 mL of 45.6 mg/mL human serum albumin (vehicle control) daily on days 1-9 inclusive Mice were sacrificed on day 10 (Avertin, 0.5 mL intraperitoneally) and the tumor inoculation site assessed for neovascularization, measured by an observer blind as to treatment group. Vessels were counted under fixed magnification under a dissecting microscope. Every radially-oriented vessel entering the periphery of the tumor was scored as a single vessel. Each group consisted of three mice.
As shown in Figure 10, a single administration of 1 MU of 20 kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified lFN-f3-1a (group C) was as effective at reducing the number of neovessels as daily administration of 1 MU of unmodified IFN-13-1 a (group B). However, the effect of the 20 kDa mPEG-0-2-methylpropionaldehyde-modified IFN-13-la is more pronounced when considering that daily administration of the vehicle alone had some inhibitory effect (compare group A, vehicle given once, with group D, vehicle given daily).
A variety of other models have also been developed which can be used to test the anti-angiogenic and anti-neovascularization effects of the PEGylated molecules of the invention.
Some of these models have been described in United States Patents 5,733,876 (Mar. 31,1998:
"Method of inhibiting angiogenesis") and 5,135,919 (Aug. 4, 1992: "-Method and a pharmaceutical composition for the inhibition of angiogenesis"). Other assays include the shell-less chorioallantoic membrane (CAM) assay of Taylor and Folkman; Nature 297:307 (1982) and Crum et al., Science 230:1375 (1985); the mouse dorsal air sac method anti-angiogenesis model of Folktitan et al.; J. Exp. Med.133: 275 (1971), and the rat corneal rnicropocket assay of Gimbrone, Jr. et al., J. Natl. Cancer Inst. 52:413 (1974) in which corneal vascularization is induced in adult male rats of the Sprague-Dawley strain (Charles River, Japan) by implanting 500 ng of bFGF (bovine, R & D Systems, Inc.), impregnated in ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer pellets, in each cornea. In addition, a model exists in which angiogenesis is induced in NM-Swiss or athyrnic nude (nu/nu) mice after implantation of MCF-7 breast carcinoma or NIH-OVCAR-3 ovarian carcinoma cells as described by Lindner and Borden; Int. J. Cancer 71:456 (1997). Additional tumor cell lines including (but not limited to) SK-MEL-1 human malignant melanoma cells may also be used to induce angiogenesis as described above. Various doses, with various dosing frequencies, and for various duration can be tested for both the unmodified and PEGylated WN-13-1a proteins of the invention.
Other methods for testing PEGylated murine and rat IFN-13 for anti-angiogenic effects in an animal model include (but are not limited to) protocols for screening new potential anticancer agents as described in the original Cancer Chemotherapy Reports, Part 3, Vol. 3, No.2, September 1972 and the supplement In Vivo Cancer Models, 1976-1982, N1H
Publication No. 84-2635, February 1984. Because of the species specificity of Type I
interferons, to assess the anti-angiogenie activity of PEGylated IFN--(3 in rodent models, PEGylated rodent IFN-13 preparations (e.g., mutine and rat) are generated.
Such screening methods are exemplified by a protocol to test for the anti-angiogenic effects of PEGylated murine IFN-j3 on subcutaneously-implanted Lewis Lung Carcinoma:
Origin of Tumor Line This tumor line arose spontaneously in 1951 as a carcinoma of the lung in a mouse.
Summary of Test Procedure A tumor fragment is implanted subcutaneously in the axillary region of a mouse. The test agent (i.e., a PEGylated interferon of the invention) is administered at various doses, subcutaneously (SC) or intraperitoneally (Ip) on multiple days following tumor implantation. The parameter measured is median survival time. Results are expressed as a percentage of control survival time.
Animals Propagation: C57I3L/6 mice.
Testing: B6D2F1 mice.

Weight: Mice are within a 3 g weight range, with a minimum weight of 18 g for males and 17 g for females.
Sex: One sex is used for all test and control animals in one experiment.
Source: One source, if feasible, for all animals in one experiment.
Experiment Size Ten animals per test group.
Tumor Transfer PROPAGATION:
Fragment: Prepare a 2-4 min fragment of a SC donor tumor.
Time: Day 13-15.
Site: Implant the fragment SC in the axillary region with a puncture in the inguinal region.
Fragment: Prepare a 2-4 min fragment of SC donor tumor.
Time: Day 13-15.
Site: Implant the fragment SC in the axillary region with a puncture in the inguinal region.
Testing Schedule Day 0: Implant tumor. Run bacterial cultures. Test positive control compound in every odd-numbered experiment. Prepare materials. Record deaths daily.
Day 1: Check cultures. Discard experiment if contaminated. Randomize animals.
Treat as instructed (on day 1 and on following days).
Day 2: Recheck cultures. Discard experiment if contaminated.
Day 5: Weigh Day 2 and day of initial test agent toxicity evaluation.
Day 14: Control early-death day.
Day 48: Control no-take day.
Day 60: End and evaluate experiment. Examine lungs for tumor.
Quality Control Schedule the positive control compound (NSC 26271; Cytoxan at a dose of 100 mg/kg/injection) in every odd-numbered experiment, the regimen for which is intraperitoneal on Day I only. The lower Test/Control limit for the positive control is 140%.
The acceptable untreated control median survival time is 19-35.6 days.

Evaluation The parameter measured is median survival time. Compute the mean animal body weights for Day 1 and Day 5, compute Test/Control ratio for all test groups.
The mean animal body weights for staging day and final evaluation day are computed. The Test/Control ratio is computed for all test groups with >65% survivors on Day 5. A Test/Control ratio value <86%
indicates toxicity. An excessive body weight change difference (test minus control) may also be used in evaluating toxicity.
Criteria for Activity An initial Test/Control ratio greater than or equal to 140% is considered necessary to demonstrate moderate activity. A reproducible Test/Control ratio value of greater than or equal to 150% is considered significant activity.
EXAMPLE 8: In vivo models to test the antiproliferative and anti-tumor effects of PEGylated human IFN-13-1a and PEGylated rodent Is-J3 Various in vivo models are available to test the anti-proliferative and anti-tumor effects of unmodified and PEGylated human IFNs-f3-la of the invention. In a model described by Bailon et al., Bioconjugate Chemistry 12:195 (2001), athymic nude mice (Harlan) are implanted subcutaneously with 2 x 106 human renal A498, human renal ACHN, or human renal cells under the rear flank and 3-6 weeks allowed for tumors to develop.
Unmodified or PEGylated human EFN-13-la is then administered at various doses, with various dosing frequencies, and for various duration, and tumor volume measured and compared between treatments. In another model described by Lindner and Borden, J. Interferon CytokMe Res 17:
681 (1997), athymic nude (nulnu) oophorectomized female BALB/c mice are implanted with 2 x 106 MCF-7 (plus estradiol), MDA-MB-231, MDA-MB-468, or BT-20 human breast carcinoma cells, N111-0VCAR-3 human ovarian carcinoma cells, HT-29 human colon carcinoma cells, or SK-MEL-1 or FEMX human malignant melinoma cells, into the derrnis overlying the mammary glands nearest the axillae, and the size of the tumors assessed as a function of time. Unmodified or PEGylated human EFN-f3-1. a is then administered at various doses, with various dosing frequencies, and for various duration, and tumor volume measured and compared between treatments. Other models for testing the anti-proliferative and anti-tumor effects of PEGylated human IFN-p-la include (but are not limited to) local and metastatic lung cancer models described by Qin et al., Molecular Therapy 4:
356 (2009.), and nude mouse xenograft models of human colorectal cancer liver metastases described by Tada et al., I Clinical Investigation 108: 83 (2001).
Other methods for testing PEGylated murine and rat 1FN-13 for anti-proliferative and anti-tumor effects in animal models include (but are not limited to) a mouse model of malignant mesothelioma described by Odaka et al., Cancer Res 61: 6201 (2001), local and metastatic lung cancer models described by Qin et al., Molecular Therapy 4:
356 (2001), and syngeneic mouse models of colorectal cancer liver metastases described by Tada et al., J
Clinical Investigation 108: 83 (2001).
EXAMPLE 9: In vivo models to test anti-viral effects of PEGylated murine IFN-f3 and PEGylated human IFN-13-la An in vivo mouse model is available to test the effect of unmodified and PEGylated murine IFN-I3 on the levels of human Hepatitis B Virus (HBV) in HBV-transgenic SCID mice.
Larkin et al., Nature Medicine 5:907 (1999). In this model, transgenic SCID
mice carrying a head-to-tail dimer of the human HI3V genome have detectable levels of HBV
replicative forms and pre-genomic RNA in the liver, and HBV virus in the serum. Hepatocytes from the transgenic mice are also positive for the IlBsAg, HBcAg, and HbxAg proteins, indicative of viral replication. An example of a protocol for comparing unmodified and PEGylated murine IFN-P in this model is given below:
30 mice (5 groups of 5 plus 5 spare) with comparable viral titer are titered at two independent time points (at least 1 week apart) to establish a baseline titer and to ensure that their titers remain constant prior to dosing with murine rEN-13. Groups of 5 mice are dosed 3 times per week (Monday, Wednesday, and Friday) subcutaneously with the following samples, as shown in Table 7.
Table 7 Group Dosing sample 1 Vehicle control (1 mg/mL murine serum albumin, MSA) 2 30 U unmodified murine IFN-I3 in 1 nig/mL MSA
3 300 U unmodified murine IFN-P in 1 mg/mL MSA
4 3000 U unmodified murine IFN-13 in 1 mg,/mL MSA
5 30 U PEGylated murine IFN-f1 in 1 nig/mL MSA
6 300 U PEGylated murine IEN-(3 in 1 Ing/naL MSA
7 3000 U PEGylated murine IFN-13 in 1 ing/mL MSA

Viral titers are determined weekly during dosing and weekly to bi-weekly for 6 months following dosing. Plots of viral titer against time are constructed for a comparison of vehicle and 1PN-13-treated animals with respect to the clearance and re-establislunent of viral titer. A
second study is then performed with the appropriate doses of unmodified and PEGylated murine TEN-13 with 10-20 mice per group for a total of 30-60 mice (10-20 for control, 10-20 for unmodified murine 11N-13, and 10-20 for PEGylated murine IFN-f3). Viral titers are assessed as above, and at sacrifice, serum is analyzed for viral titer as well as for HbsAg by SDS-PAGE
and Western blotting. Livers are also removed, frozen or fixed as necessary, and stained for the presence of HbsAg, HbcAg, and HbxAg. Other appropriate histological, histochemical, or biochemical tests familiar to those in the art may also be performed on serum and tissue samples.
An in vivo mouse model is also available to test the effect of unmodified and PEGylated human IFN-f3-1a on the levels of human Hepatitis C Virus (HCV) in mice carrying chimaeric human livers. Mercer et al., Nature Medicine 7:927 (2001). In this model, normal human hepatocytes are grafted into SOD mice carrying a plasminogen activator transgene (Alb-uPA) and the mice inoculated with serum from humans infected with the different gentoypes of HCV. The engrafted human liver cells become infected by the virus and the virus replicates. Levels of HCV RNA in the serum can be quantified by PCR, as well as the levels of positive and negative (replicative form) RNA in the liver cells. An appropriate study protocol similar to (but not limited to) that described above for unmodified and PEGylated murine IFN-f3 in transgenic HBV SC1D mice is performed to assess the efficacy of unmodified and PEGylated human IFN-f3-1a in this model i.e. to determine the effect of treatment on HCV
titer, liver histology, serum ALT levels, and the presence of HCV replicative forms in the engrafted human liver tissue. Other appropriate histological, histochemical, or biochemical tests familiar to those in the art may also be performed on serum and tissue samples.

Claims (19)

Claims
1. An injectable composition comprising:
a) a compound having formula:
wherein E is hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain C1 to C20 alkyl group, or a detectable label;
a is an integer from 4 to 10,000;
each Z and Z is independently hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein in the substituted groups the substitution is selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, an aromatic moiety, a heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and alkylthio, provided that at least one Z or Z' is not hydrogen;

R* is a linking moiety formed from the reaction of a moiety selected from the group consisting of aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, and acetal, with B, wherein B is a biologically-active molecule or precursor thereof that comprises interferon-beta-la (IFN-.beta.-1a);
each n is 0 or an integer from 1 to 5;
p is 1, 2, or 3; and b) an excipient comprising an arginine, an acetate salt, a polysorbate, or a combination thereof.
2. The injectable composition of claim 1, wherein E is hydrogen or a straight- or branched-chain C1 to C20 alkyl group and a is an integer from 4 to 10,000.
3. The injectable composition of claim 1, wherein Z is hydrogen.
4. The injectable composition of claim 3, wherein Z is methyl.
5. The injectable composition of claim 1, wherein the compound is mPEG-O-2-methylpropionaldehyde-IFN-.beta.-1a, mPEG-O-p-methylphenyl-O-2-methylpropionaldehyde-IFN-.beta.-1a, mPEG-O-m-methylphenyl-O-2-methylpropionaldehyde-IFN-.beta.-1a, mPEG-O-p-phenylacetaldehyde-IFN-.beta.-1a, mPEG-O-p-phenylpropionaldehyde-IFN-.beta.-1a, or mPEG-O-m-phenylacetaldehyde-IFN-.beta.-1a.
6. The injectable composition of claim 1, wherein R* is methylene and wherein B is attached to R* by a bond between the methylene and an amine of the IFN-.beta.-la.
7. The injectable composition of claim 6, wherein the amine is an amino terminus of the IFN-.beta.-1a.
8. The injectable composition of claim 1, wherein the composition is a solution.
9. The injectable composition of claim 1, wherein the composition is a unit dosage form.
10. Use of an injectable composition comprising:
a) a compound having formula:
wherein E is hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain C1 to C20 alkyl group, or a detectable label;
a is an integer from 4 to 10,000;
each Z and Z' is independently hydrogen, a straight- or branched-chain, saturated or unsaturated C1 to C20 alkyl or heteroalkyl group, C3 to C8 saturated or unsaturated cyclic alkyl or cyclic heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted alkaryl wherein the alkyl is a C1 to saturated or unsaturated alkyl or heteroalkaryl group, wherein in the substituted groups the substitution is selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxylate, ester, formyl, acyl, thiocarbonyl, thioester, thioacetate, thioformate, alkoxyl, phosphoryl, phosphonate, phosphinate, amino, amido, amidine, imine, cyano, nitro, azido, sulfhydryl, sulfate, sulfonate, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, an aromatic moiety, a heteroaromatic moiety, imino, silyl, ether, and alkylthio, provided that at least one Z or Z' is not hydrogen;
R* is a linking moiety formed from the reaction of a moiety selected from the group consisting of aldehyde, aldehyde hydrate, and acetal, with B, wherein B is a biologically-active molecule or precursor thereof that comprises interferon-beta-la (IFN-.beta.-1a);
each n is 0 or an integer from 1 to 5;
p is 1, 2, or 3; and an excipient comprising an arginine, an acetate salt, a polysorbate, or a combination thereof, to treat multiple sclerosis.
11. The use of claim 10, wherein the injectable composition contains 0.01-100 µg/kg of said compound.
12. The use of claim 10, wherein the injectable composition is adapted for subcutaneous injection.
13. The use of claim 10, further comprising use of an analgesic and/or anti-pyretic agent in the treatment of multiple sclerosis.
14. The use of claim 10, wherein E is hydrogen or a straight- or branched-chain C1 to C20 alkyl group and a is an integer from 4 to 10,000.
15. The use of claim 10, wherein Z is hydrogen.
16. The use of claim 15, wherein Z is methyl.
17. The use of claim 10, wherein the compound is mPEG-O-2-methylpropionaldehyde-IFN-.beta.-1a, mPEG-O-p-methylphenyl-O-2-methylpropionaldehyde-IFN-.beta.-1a, mPEG-O-m-methylphenyl-O-2-methylpropionaldehyde-IFN-.beta.-1a, mPEG-O-p-phenylacetaldehyde-IFN-.beta.-1a, mPEG-O-p-phenylpropionaldehyde-IFN-.beta.-1a, or mPEG-O-m-phenylacetaldehyde-IFN-.beta.-1a.
18. The use of claim 10, wherein R* is methylene and wherein B is attached to R* by a bond between the methylene and an amine of the IFN-.beta.-1a.
19. The use of claim 18, wherein the amine is an amino terminus of the IFN-.beta.-1a.
CA2952488A 2002-01-18 2003-01-17 Polyalkylene glycol with moiety for conjugating biologically active compounds Expired - Lifetime CA2952488C (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US34991702P 2002-01-18 2002-01-18
US60/349,917 2002-01-18
CA2840490A CA2840490C (en) 2002-01-18 2003-01-17 Polyalkylene glycol with moiety for conjugating biologically active compounds

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CA2840490A Division CA2840490C (en) 2002-01-18 2003-01-17 Polyalkylene glycol with moiety for conjugating biologically active compounds

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
CA2952488A1 CA2952488A1 (en) 2003-07-31
CA2952488C true CA2952488C (en) 2019-05-07

Family

ID=27613339

Family Applications (4)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CA2473526A Expired - Lifetime CA2473526C (en) 2002-01-18 2003-01-17 Polyalkylene polymer compounds and uses thereof
CA2840490A Expired - Lifetime CA2840490C (en) 2002-01-18 2003-01-17 Polyalkylene glycol with moiety for conjugating biologically active compounds
CA2753899A Expired - Lifetime CA2753899C (en) 2002-01-18 2003-01-17 Polyalkylene glycol with moiety for conjugating biologically active compounds
CA2952488A Expired - Lifetime CA2952488C (en) 2002-01-18 2003-01-17 Polyalkylene glycol with moiety for conjugating biologically active compounds

Family Applications Before (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CA2473526A Expired - Lifetime CA2473526C (en) 2002-01-18 2003-01-17 Polyalkylene polymer compounds and uses thereof
CA2840490A Expired - Lifetime CA2840490C (en) 2002-01-18 2003-01-17 Polyalkylene glycol with moiety for conjugating biologically active compounds
CA2753899A Expired - Lifetime CA2753899C (en) 2002-01-18 2003-01-17 Polyalkylene glycol with moiety for conjugating biologically active compounds

Country Status (35)

Country Link
US (2) US8017733B2 (en)
EP (3) EP3669887A1 (en)
JP (5) JP2005526151A (en)
KR (1) KR100964411B1 (en)
CN (2) CN101700401B (en)
AU (1) AU2003210564B2 (en)
BE (1) BE2016C040I2 (en)
BG (1) BG66525B1 (en)
BR (1) BRPI0306993B8 (en)
CA (4) CA2473526C (en)
CY (2) CY2016027I2 (en)
CZ (1) CZ2004877A3 (en)
DK (2) DK3025726T3 (en)
EA (2) EA009783B1 (en)
EE (1) EE05509B1 (en)
ES (2) ES2566797T3 (en)
GE (2) GEP20064024B (en)
HK (3) HK1072721A1 (en)
HU (4) HU230473B1 (en)
IL (1) IL163006A (en)
IS (1) IS2989B (en)
LU (1) LU93162I2 (en)
ME (2) ME00239B (en)
MX (1) MXPA04006855A (en)
NL (1) NL300826I2 (en)
NO (3) NO339857B1 (en)
NZ (1) NZ534708A (en)
PL (2) PL213322B1 (en)
PT (1) PT3025726T (en)
RS (1) RS55578B1 (en)
SI (2) SI1476181T1 (en)
SK (1) SK3102004A3 (en)
UA (1) UA82184C2 (en)
WO (1) WO2003061577A2 (en)
ZA (1) ZA200406555B (en)

Families Citing this family (36)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
PL213322B1 (en) * 2002-01-18 2013-02-28 Biogen Idec Inc Polyalkylene polymer compounds and uses thereof
US20150246097A9 (en) * 2002-01-18 2015-09-03 Biogen Idec Ma Inc. Polyalkylene Polymer Compounds and Uses Thereof
NZ538624A (en) 2002-09-09 2007-01-26 Nektar Therapeutics Al Corp Water-soluble polymer alkanals
US8129330B2 (en) 2002-09-30 2012-03-06 Mountain View Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Polymer conjugates with decreased antigenicity, methods of preparation and uses thereof
EP1628618A4 (en) * 2002-12-26 2009-09-09 Mountain View Pharmaceuticals Polymer conjugates of cytokines, chemokines, growth factors, polypeptide hormones and antagonists thereof with preserved receptor-binding activity
BR0317742A (en) 2002-12-26 2005-11-22 Mountain View Pharmaceuticals Interferon-beta polymeric conjugates with increased biological potency
US7432331B2 (en) 2002-12-31 2008-10-07 Nektar Therapeutics Al, Corporation Hydrolytically stable maleimide-terminated polymers
SI1635875T1 (en) 2003-06-26 2009-04-30 Psivida Inc In-situ gelling drug delivery system
WO2005000268A2 (en) 2003-06-26 2005-01-06 Control Delivery Systems, Inc. Bioerodible sustained release drug delivery systems
EP1758583A2 (en) * 2004-05-31 2007-03-07 Ranbaxy Laboratories Limited Arylpiperazine derivatives useful as adrenergic receptor antagonists
DE602005025805D1 (en) 2004-12-21 2011-02-17 Nektar Therapeutics San Carlos STABILIZED POLYMER THIOL REAGENTS
WO2006130553A2 (en) * 2005-06-02 2006-12-07 Schering Corporation Hcv protease inhibitors
JP2009501246A (en) * 2005-07-08 2009-01-15 イーラン ファーマスーティカルズ、インコーポレイテッド Preparation of polymer composites of therapeutic, agricultural and food additive compounds
BRPI0712013A2 (en) * 2006-05-22 2011-12-27 Elan Pharm Inc preparation of polymeric conjugates of therapeutic compounds, agricultural compounds and food additives
US20100222546A1 (en) * 2006-11-28 2010-09-02 David Crich Methods for the preparation of functionalized peptides, proteins and carbohydrates and their conjugates
CA2693616A1 (en) * 2007-07-11 2009-01-15 Enzon Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Polymeric drug delivery system containing a multi-substituted aromatic moiety
CA2693645A1 (en) * 2007-07-11 2009-01-15 Enzon Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Polymeric drug delivery systems containing an aromatic allylic acid
CL2008002399A1 (en) * 2007-08-16 2009-01-02 Pharmaessentia Corp Substantially pure conjugate having a polymeric portion, a protein portion (interferon alpha 2b) and an aliphatic binder of 1 to 10 carbon atoms, useful in the treatment of hepatitis b or c.
AU2009255994B2 (en) * 2008-06-05 2014-07-17 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Use of pegylated Type III Interferons for the treatment of hepatitis C
NZ591167A (en) * 2008-07-31 2012-06-29 Pharmaessentia Corp Peptide-polymer conjugates
GB0823309D0 (en) * 2008-12-19 2009-01-28 Univ Bath Functionalising reagents and their uses
EP2439736A1 (en) 2009-06-02 2012-04-11 Panasonic Corporation Down-mixing device, encoder, and method therefor
UA109646C2 (en) * 2009-12-10 2015-09-25 THERAPEUTIC APPLICATION OF POLYMER PROTEIN CONJUGATES
US20130225789A1 (en) * 2012-02-29 2013-08-29 Yi Sun Polyethylene Glycol Having Hetero Multiple Functional Groups
US8993614B2 (en) 2012-03-15 2015-03-31 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Substituted pyrrolidine-2-carboxamides
KR101475630B1 (en) * 2013-05-31 2014-12-22 동국대학교 산학협력단 Composition for the prevention or treatment of Hepatitis C, comprising extracts or fractions of Vitidis Vinferae Radix as an effective ingredient
US11759500B2 (en) * 2014-07-24 2023-09-19 Abion Inc. PEGylated interferon-beta variant
EP3183264B1 (en) 2014-08-19 2020-07-29 Biogen MA Inc. Pegylation method
GB201419108D0 (en) 2014-10-27 2014-12-10 Glythera Ltd Materials and methods relating to linkers for use in antibody drug conjugates
JP6820841B2 (en) 2014-11-06 2021-01-27 ファーマエッセンティア コーポレイション Dosing regimen for pegged interferon
EP3421442B1 (en) * 2017-06-28 2020-08-05 Construction Research & Technology GmbH Dispersant for inorganic particles
US11472894B2 (en) 2018-07-23 2022-10-18 Carnegie Mellon University Enzyme-assisted ATRP procedures
WO2020028715A1 (en) 2018-08-01 2020-02-06 Russell Alan J Amino-reactive positively charged atrp initiators that maintain their positive charge during synthesis of biomacro-initiators
CN109232898A (en) * 2018-08-02 2019-01-18 张玲 A kind of preparation method of the polyimides new material with anticoagulant functions
CN111534458B (en) * 2020-04-13 2022-01-14 浙江工业大学 Achromobacter TBC-1 and application thereof in degradation of 1,3,6,8-tetrabromocarbazole
CN113716982B (en) * 2021-08-24 2022-05-06 重庆云瑞肥业有限公司 Fermentation fertilizer making device for recycling food waste

Family Cites Families (81)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3710795A (en) 1970-09-29 1973-01-16 Alza Corp Drug-delivery device with stretched, rate-controlling membrane
US4179337A (en) 1973-07-20 1979-12-18 Davis Frank F Non-immunogenic polypeptides
US4002531A (en) 1976-01-22 1977-01-11 Pierce Chemical Company Modifying enzymes with polyethylene glycol and product produced thereby
EP0082481B2 (en) 1981-12-23 1990-09-12 Schering Corporation Stabilised alpha-interferon formulations and their preparation
WO1985003934A1 (en) * 1984-03-06 1985-09-12 Takeda Chemical Industries, Ltd. Chemically modified protein and process for its preparation
GB8334102D0 (en) 1983-12-21 1984-02-01 Searle & Co Interferons with cysteine pattern
DE3572982D1 (en) 1984-03-06 1989-10-19 Takeda Chemical Industries Ltd Chemically modified lymphokine and production thereof
EP0206448B1 (en) 1985-06-19 1990-11-14 Ajinomoto Co., Inc. Hemoglobin combined with a poly(alkylene oxide)
US4766106A (en) 1985-06-26 1988-08-23 Cetus Corporation Solubilization of proteins for pharmaceutical compositions using polymer conjugation
DE3676670D1 (en) 1985-06-26 1991-02-07 Cetus Corp SOLUBILIZATION OF PROTEINS FOR PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS BY POLYMER CONJUGATION.
US4917888A (en) 1985-06-26 1990-04-17 Cetus Corporation Solubilization of immunotoxins for pharmaceutical compositions using polymer conjugation
JP2514950B2 (en) 1986-03-10 1996-07-10 エフ・ホフマン―ラ ロシユ アーゲー Chemically modified protein, its production method and intermediate
US4894226A (en) 1986-11-14 1990-01-16 Cetus Corporation Solubilization of proteins for pharmaceutical compositions using polyproline conjugation
US5080891A (en) 1987-08-03 1992-01-14 Ddi Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Conjugates of superoxide dismutase coupled to high molecular weight polyalkylene glycols
US5135919A (en) 1988-01-19 1992-08-04 Children's Medical Center Corporation Method and a pharmaceutical composition for the inhibition of angiogenesis
US5116964A (en) 1989-02-23 1992-05-26 Genentech, Inc. Hybrid immunoglobulins
US5286637A (en) * 1989-08-07 1994-02-15 Debiopharm, S.A. Biologically active drug polymer derivatives and method for preparing same
US5252714A (en) * 1990-11-28 1993-10-12 The University Of Alabama In Huntsville Preparation and use of polyethylene glycol propionaldehyde
US5595732A (en) 1991-03-25 1997-01-21 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Polyethylene-protein conjugates
US5281698A (en) 1991-07-23 1994-01-25 Cetus Oncology Corporation Preparation of an activated polymer ester for protein conjugation
AU3423293A (en) 1991-12-19 1993-07-19 Baylor College Of Medicine Pva or peg conjugates of peptides for epitope-specific immunosuppression
ZA933926B (en) 1992-06-17 1994-01-03 Amgen Inc Polyoxymethylene-oxyethylene copolymers in conjuction with blomolecules
US5382657A (en) * 1992-08-26 1995-01-17 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Peg-interferon conjugates
US5262564A (en) 1992-10-30 1993-11-16 Octamer, Inc. Sulfinic acid adducts of organo nitroso compounds useful as retroviral inactivating agents anti-retroviral agents and anti-tumor agents
US5298410A (en) 1993-02-25 1994-03-29 Sterling Winthrop Inc. Lyophilized formulation of polyethylene oxide modified proteins with increased shelf-life
US5681811A (en) 1993-05-10 1997-10-28 Protein Delivery, Inc. Conjugation-stabilized therapeutic agent compositions, delivery and diagnostic formulations comprising same, and method of making and using the same
US5359030A (en) 1993-05-10 1994-10-25 Protein Delivery, Inc. Conjugation-stabilized polypeptide compositions, therapeutic delivery and diagnostic formulations comprising same, and method of making and using the same
US5874075A (en) 1993-10-06 1999-02-23 Amgen Inc. Stable protein: phospholipid compositions and methods
US5951974A (en) 1993-11-10 1999-09-14 Enzon, Inc. Interferon polymer conjugates
PT730470E (en) 1993-11-10 2002-08-30 Enzon Inc IMPROVED INTERFERENCE-POLYMER CONJUGATES
US5446090A (en) 1993-11-12 1995-08-29 Shearwater Polymers, Inc. Isolatable, water soluble, and hydrolytically stable active sulfones of poly(ethylene glycol) and related polymers for modification of surfaces and molecules
US5639725A (en) 1994-04-26 1997-06-17 Children's Hospital Medical Center Corp. Angiostatin protein
US5730990A (en) * 1994-06-24 1998-03-24 Enzon, Inc. Non-antigenic amine derived polymers and polymer conjugates
US5650234A (en) 1994-09-09 1997-07-22 Surface Engineering Technologies, Division Of Innerdyne, Inc. Electrophilic polyethylene oxides for the modification of polysaccharides, polypeptides (proteins) and surfaces
US5824784A (en) 1994-10-12 1998-10-20 Amgen Inc. N-terminally chemically modified protein compositions and methods
US5738846A (en) 1994-11-10 1998-04-14 Enzon, Inc. Interferon polymer conjugates and process for preparing the same
WO1996017929A1 (en) 1994-12-07 1996-06-13 Novo Nordisk A/S Polypeptide with reduced allergenicity
US5932462A (en) 1995-01-10 1999-08-03 Shearwater Polymers, Inc. Multiarmed, monofunctional, polymer for coupling to molecules and surfaces
US5672662A (en) 1995-07-07 1997-09-30 Shearwater Polymers, Inc. Poly(ethylene glycol) and related polymers monosubstituted with propionic or butanoic acids and functional derivatives thereof for biotechnical applications
SE9503380D0 (en) * 1995-09-29 1995-09-29 Pharmacia Ab Protein derivatives
NZ322686A (en) * 1995-10-19 2000-01-28 Univ Washington Discrete-length polyethene glycols
US5702717A (en) 1995-10-25 1997-12-30 Macromed, Inc. Thermosensitive biodegradable polymers based on poly(ether-ester)block copolymers
US5908621A (en) 1995-11-02 1999-06-01 Schering Corporation Polyethylene glycol modified interferon therapy
US5747639A (en) 1996-03-06 1998-05-05 Amgen Boulder Inc. Use of hydrophobic interaction chromatography to purify polyethylene glycols
ATE200030T1 (en) 1997-01-29 2001-04-15 Polymasc Pharmaceuticals Plc PEGYLATION PROCEDURE
NZ337703A (en) 1997-03-05 2001-05-25 Univ Washington A screening method to identify agents that selectively inhibit Hepatitis C virus replication in viruses that contain an ISDR region
US5990237A (en) * 1997-05-21 1999-11-23 Shearwater Polymers, Inc. Poly(ethylene glycol) aldehyde hydrates and related polymers and applications in modifying amines
US6448369B1 (en) 1997-11-06 2002-09-10 Shearwater Corporation Heterobifunctional poly(ethylene glycol) derivatives and methods for their preparation
US7642323B2 (en) 1997-11-06 2010-01-05 Nektar Therapeutics Heterobifunctional poly(ethylene glycol) derivatives and methods for their preparation
US6180095B1 (en) 1997-12-17 2001-01-30 Enzon, Inc. Polymeric prodrugs of amino- and hydroxyl-containing bioactive agents
AU1825299A (en) * 1997-12-17 1999-07-05 Enzon, Inc. Polymeric prodrugs of amino- and hydroxyl-containing bioactive agents
US5981709A (en) 1997-12-19 1999-11-09 Enzon, Inc. α-interferon-polymer-conjugates having enhanced biological activity and methods of preparing the same
US5985263A (en) 1997-12-19 1999-11-16 Enzon, Inc. Substantially pure histidine-linked protein polymer conjugates
US5965119A (en) 1997-12-30 1999-10-12 Enzon, Inc. Trialkyl-lock-facilitated polymeric prodrugs of amino-containing bioactive agents
JP4078032B2 (en) 1998-03-12 2008-04-23 ネクター セラピューティックス エイエル，コーポレイション Poly (ethylene glycol) derivatives with proximal reactive groups
PT1421956E (en) 1998-04-28 2007-07-13 Serono Lab Process for stepwise attachment of polyethylene glycol (peg) to a polypeptide
US6703381B1 (en) 1998-08-14 2004-03-09 Nobex Corporation Methods for delivery therapeutic compounds across the blood-brain barrier
ES2630278T3 (en) 1998-10-16 2017-08-21 Biogen Ma Inc. Interferon beta-1a polymer conjugates and uses thereof
US6602952B1 (en) * 1999-06-11 2003-08-05 Shearwater Corporation Hydrogels derived from chitosan and poly(ethylene glycol) or related polymers
US6531122B1 (en) * 1999-08-27 2003-03-11 Maxygen Aps Interferon-β variants and conjugates
CA2380760A1 (en) 1999-08-27 2001-03-08 Maxygen Aps New interferon beta-like molecules
US7144574B2 (en) 1999-08-27 2006-12-05 Maxygen Aps Interferon β variants and conjugates
US6495659B2 (en) * 1999-12-22 2002-12-17 Shearwater Corporation Sterically hindered poly(ethylene glycol) alkanoic acids and derivatives thereof
US6413507B1 (en) * 1999-12-23 2002-07-02 Shearwater Corporation Hydrolytically degradable carbamate derivatives of poly (ethylene glycol)
US7052686B2 (en) * 2000-09-29 2006-05-30 Schering Corporation Pegylated interleukin-10
US7053150B2 (en) 2000-12-18 2006-05-30 Nektar Therapeutics Al, Corporation Segmented polymers and their conjugates
TW593427B (en) * 2000-12-18 2004-06-21 Nektar Therapeutics Al Corp Synthesis of high molecular weight non-peptidic polymer derivatives
PT1355936E (en) * 2001-02-01 2007-09-28 Biogen Idec Inc Polymer conjugates of neublastin and methods of using same
MXPA03007619A (en) 2001-02-27 2003-12-04 Maxygen Aps New interferon beta-like molecules.
US7009033B2 (en) 2001-07-02 2006-03-07 Polymer Source Inc. Heterofunctional polyethylene glycol and polyethylene oxide, process for their manufacture
SI2939696T1 (en) * 2001-10-18 2016-06-30 Nektar Therapeutics Polymer conjugates of opioid antagonists
JP2005525302A (en) * 2001-11-20 2005-08-25 ファルマシア・コーポレーション Chemically modified human growth hormone conjugates
US7041855B2 (en) 2001-12-11 2006-05-09 Sun Bio, Inc. Monofunctional polyethylene glycol aldehydes
KR100488351B1 (en) 2001-12-11 2005-05-11 선바이오(주) Novel polyethylene glycol-propionaldehyde derivatives
US6956135B2 (en) 2001-12-11 2005-10-18 Sun Bio, Inc. Monofunctional polyethylene glycol aldehydes
EP1507755A4 (en) * 2001-12-11 2006-05-17 Sun Bio Inc Novel monofunctional polyethylene glycol aldehydes
US6916962B2 (en) 2001-12-11 2005-07-12 Sun Bio, Inc. Monofunctional polyethylene glycol aldehydes
PL213322B1 (en) * 2002-01-18 2013-02-28 Biogen Idec Inc Polyalkylene polymer compounds and uses thereof
NZ538624A (en) 2002-09-09 2007-01-26 Nektar Therapeutics Al Corp Water-soluble polymer alkanals
BR0317742A (en) 2002-12-26 2005-11-22 Mountain View Pharmaceuticals Interferon-beta polymeric conjugates with increased biological potency
US20110165122A1 (en) * 2009-11-10 2011-07-07 The Regents Of The University Of California Method for targeted and sustained antiviral therapy

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN101700401A (en) 2010-05-05
CA2473526C (en) 2013-10-22
WO2003061577A8 (en) 2008-11-20
CA2840490A1 (en) 2003-07-31
PT3025726T (en) 2020-01-09
JP2009235409A (en) 2009-10-15
CY2016027I1 (en) 2017-06-28
CA2473526A1 (en) 2003-07-31
CY2016027I2 (en) 2017-06-28
HK1143553A1 (en) 2011-01-07
GEP20074024B (en) 2007-01-10
HUE047557T2 (en) 2020-04-28
HUS1600035I1 (en) 2016-10-28
PL372728A1 (en) 2005-08-08
CA2753899C (en) 2014-03-25
CZ2004877A3 (en) 2004-12-15
EA011829B1 (en) 2009-06-30
MXPA04006855A (en) 2005-04-19
NO339857B1 (en) 2017-02-06
MEP35608A (en) 2011-02-10
NO2017013I1 (en) 2017-04-10
EA009783B1 (en) 2008-04-28
SK3102004A3 (en) 2005-01-03
EP3669887A1 (en) 2020-06-24
EE200400105A (en) 2004-12-15
ES2774801T3 (en) 2020-07-22
NO344612B1 (en) 2020-02-10
KR20040081463A (en) 2004-09-21
EA200701386A1 (en) 2007-10-26
NO2017013I2 (en) 2018-08-20
NO20151082A1 (en) 2015-08-26
BG66525B1 (en) 2016-04-28
JP2016014022A (en) 2016-01-28
NZ534708A (en) 2007-05-31
HUP0500457A3 (en) 2012-09-28
HUP0500457A2 (en) 2005-08-29
US8017733B2 (en) 2011-09-13
WO2003061577A2 (en) 2003-07-31
EA200400962A1 (en) 2005-06-30
US8524660B2 (en) 2013-09-03
CY1122841T1 (en) 2021-10-29
RS55578B1 (en) 2017-06-30
DK1476181T3 (en) 2016-05-23
CN101700401B (en) 2013-08-14
JP2012255156A (en) 2012-12-27
HUE028163T2 (en) 2016-11-28
EE05509B1 (en) 2012-02-15
CA2753899A1 (en) 2003-07-31
JP2005526151A (en) 2005-09-02
JP6030717B2 (en) 2016-11-24
KR100964411B1 (en) 2010-06-15
BRPI0306993B1 (en) 2020-03-10
PL213322B1 (en) 2013-02-28
US20050107277A1 (en) 2005-05-19
EP1476181A4 (en) 2008-11-19
IL163006A (en) 2011-01-31
BG108839A (en) 2005-04-30
HK1224185A1 (en) 2017-08-18
EP1476181A2 (en) 2004-11-17
ZA200406555B (en) 2005-11-30
NL300826I2 (en) 2017-03-16
WO2003061577A3 (en) 2003-10-02
IS2989B (en) 2017-11-15
SI3025726T1 (en) 2020-03-31
EP1476181B1 (en) 2016-03-23
LU93162I2 (en) 2016-10-03
ME00239B (en) 2011-05-10
HU230473B1 (en) 2016-07-28
IS7353A (en) 2004-07-15
SI1476181T1 (en) 2016-10-28
EP3025726A1 (en) 2016-06-01
HK1072721A1 (en) 2005-09-09
UA82184C2 (en) 2008-03-25
GEP20064024B (en) 2007-01-10
BR0306993A (en) 2005-09-06
US20120014916A1 (en) 2012-01-19
ES2566797T3 (en) 2016-04-15
BE2016C040I2 (en) 2022-05-17
DK3025726T3 (en) 2019-12-09
JP5275125B2 (en) 2013-08-28
CA2840490C (en) 2017-02-28
CN1630530A (en) 2005-06-22
BRPI0306993B8 (en) 2021-05-25
EP3025726B1 (en) 2019-11-20
CA2952488A1 (en) 2003-07-31
PL397261A1 (en) 2012-03-26
AU2003210564B2 (en) 2008-10-23
RS63504A (en) 2007-02-05
JP2013136756A (en) 2013-07-11
NO20043422L (en) 2004-10-11

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CA2952488C (en) Polyalkylene glycol with moiety for conjugating biologically active compounds
AU2003210564A1 (en) Polyalkylene glycol with moiety for conjugating biologically active compound
JP2005526151A5 (en)
US20170049904A1 (en) Polyalkylene polymer compounds and uses thereof

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
EEER Examination request

Effective date: 20161221

MKEX Expiry

Effective date: 20230117